Model Case Circuit Breakers - Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers PDF

W o r l d S u p e r
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS &

EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Series
EC97J1128
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation's Fukuyama Works,

which produces these products, is certified as meeting
07
the ISO 14001:2004 environmental management system standard.
A
INDEX This material has been prepared for those who use the products for
manufacturing assemblies, for holding electric works, for holding
maintenance and for the others acquainted with electric expertise
including those who operate the products (final users).
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 1
Features .............................................................................................................................................. 3
The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution ...................................................................... 9
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models ...................................................................... 11
2. Detailed Specifications ................................................................................................................. 13

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ........................................................................................................................................ 13
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... 21
Motor-Protection Breakers .............................................................................................................................................. 25
UL Listed Products .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Miniature Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................................................................... 27
ELRs and ZCTs ................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Circuit Protectors ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
3. Special Purpose Breakers ............................................................................................................ 34

Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers) ............................................................................................................ 34
DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches ....................................................................................................................... 34
400Hz-Use MCCBs ........................................................................................................................................................... 35
Low-Instantaneous MCCBs ............................................................................................................................................. 35
Generator-Protection MCCBs ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Measuring Display Unit (MDU) Breakers ....................................................................................................................... 36
4. Connection Method ...................................................................................................................... 42

1. Connection Types ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
2. Connection Accessories ............................................................................................................................................................ 42
3. Connection of Line and Load ..................................................................................................................................................... 42
Caution
The manual covers the product specifications for selecting an appropriate
low-voltage breaker. There is the “HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE”
describing how to handle the products. To use the products, separately
request the “HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE”, for correct operation.
1
5. Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 43
Internal Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................... 43
1. Accessories ...............................................................................................................................................................................
2. Switch Operation and Rating .....................................................................................................................................................
43
43
2
3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories .............................................................................................................. 44
4. Shunt Trip (SHT) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 49
5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT) ............................................................................................................................................................. 49
6. Test Button Module (TBM) ......................................................................................................................................................... 50
7. Lead-wire Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................ 50
8. Internal Terminal Type (INT) .......................................................................................................................................................
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT) ....................................................................................................................................
50
51 3
10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) .......................................................................................................................................................... 52
11. Trip Indicator (TI) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 53
12. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR) ............................................................................................................................... 53
External Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................... 54
1. V-type Operating Handle ............................................................................................................................................................ 54
2. F-type Operating Handle ............................................................................................................................................................ 55
3. S-type Operating Handle ............................................................................................................................................................
4. R-type Operating Handle ...........................................................................................................................................................
57
58
4
5. Terminal Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 60
6. Electrical Operation Device ........................................................................................................................................................ 61
7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI) ......................................................................................................................................................... 69
8. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder ...................................................................................................................................... 70
9. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters ............................................................................................................................................ 70
5
6. Characteristics and Dimensions .................................................................................................. 71
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers ..................................................................................................... 71
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................................... 107
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................................... 131
Miniature Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................................................................ 143
DIN Series ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Circuit Protectors ........................................................................................................................................................... 151
6
7. Ordering Information ................................................................................................................... 153
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... 153
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................................... 153
8. Melshort 2 .................................................................................................................................... 154

7
(A more rational and easier breakers selections)
9. Low-voltage switchgears Technical information service via the internet .............................. 155
(http://global.MitsubishiElectric.com/lvs)
8
9
Full range of MITS
(30A to 16
High-Performance
Downsizing of 630AF, New Digital ETR Glo
Compliance with w
Previous New
210 140
ASTA
1 x 104
275
257
Ir Switch
Current setting with fuse
3
1 x 10
EN
High
High-voltage fuse- voltage
Allowable short-time
Ip characteristics
TL
1 x 102 Low
Long-delay operating time voltage
GB
Time (s)
10 Pre-alarm
current Short-delay
Transformer
NFB
(electronic)
TUV
Is tripping current M
1 Load
Load current
Ts
Short-delay
operating time CCC JIS
0.1 Ii Instantaneous tripping current
0.01
Current (A) Current-converted value
on the high-voltage side
TPC
Volume 60% downsized New Digital ETR IEC
SABS
Best Solution
LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
Plenty of accessories, Easy installation

250AF (Type“SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”) Product Skelton
16 10 11 12 13
W o r l d S u p e r
22
17
7 8 9
23
18
6
24
19
15 14
Series
20
5 4 7 8 9 3 2
21
10 11 12 13
1
UBISHI WS Series
00A frame)
Reliable
bal
obal High reliability, Best performance
orldwide standards Relay JPT Mechanism Breaking Performance
Terminal
CSA
UL
Internal Accessories Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer External Accessories
Intelligent
Measuring and communicating
By using various application software for PLC, users can also connect to the
Personal network SCADA system.
Computer
MELSECNET/10
Interface card MELSECNET/10
CC-Link®
Interface I/O Unit

Unit
PLC
Eco Monitor Pro ME110S
MDU
AE-SW
2
Global Compliance with worldwide standards
W o r l d S u p e r
ASTA
CSA
EN
TUV GB
JIS
UL Series
CCC
TPC
IEC
SABS
LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
WS Series International Standard Conformance List

Safety Certification Marine Approvals
IEC JIS EN GB
UL CSA LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
International Japan Europe China USA Canada UK Germany Norway USA France Japan
Standards
• Compliance with worldwide standards (IEC/JIS/EN/GB/UL/CSA)

• Applicable to marine approvals
• New design with Laser Marking
• All products with lsolation function
• RoHS compliance
RoHS…The Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
NF250-SGW 3P
■ Full range of WS Series (up to 1600AF)

AF 32(30) 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
MCCB NF-C NF30-CS NF63-CW NF125-CW NF250-CW NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW
NF-S NF32-SW NF63-SW NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SEW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
NF125-SGW NF160-SGW NF250-SGW NF400-SEW NF630-SEW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
NF-H NF63-HW NF125-HW NF160-HW NF250-HW NF400-HEW NF630-HEW NF800-HEW
NF125-HGW NF160-HGW NF250-HGW NF400-REW NF630-REW NF800-REW
NF-U NF125-RGW NF250-RGW NF400-UEW NF800-UEW
NF125-UGW NF250-UGW
ELCB NV-C NV30-CS NV63-CW NV125-CW NV250-CW NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV-S NV32-SW NV63-SW NV125-SW NV250-SW NV400-SW NV630-SW NV800-SEW
NV250-SEW NV400-SEW NV630-SEW
NV-H NV63-HW NV125-HW NV250-HW NV400-HEW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
NV250-HEW NV400-REW
NV-U NV125-RW NV250-RW
3
W o r l d S u p e r
Downsizing,
High-Performance New Digital ETR Series
■ 400AF, 630AF & 800AF models easier to use

● 630AF models downsized to the size of 400AF model, contributing to Previous New
compact panels and simplification of design. 210 140
● MCCB-AC/DC common use (excl. Electronic trip type)

3-pole:available up to 400VDC, 4-pole:available up to 500VDC
(NF400-SW, NF630-SW)
275
257
● Improved breaking capacity at 690VAC (NF400-HEW, NF630-HEW)
New
Previous
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
15/15 kA 35/18 kA
Volume 60% downsized
● Improved breaking capacity at 400/415VAC (NF400-SEW, NF630-SW/SEW, NF800-SEW)

New
Previous
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
45/45 kA 50/50 kA
■ NEW Digital ETR (Electronic Trip Relay) for

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW & NF1600-SEW Short time-delay Instantaneous
Rated current Current setting tripping current tripping current
● Installed digital ETR same as Electronic relay for under 800AF
• Multi adjustment available (Long time delay, short time delay,
Instantaneous, pre-alarm characteristics):easier coordination with upper
breakers.
• Pre-alarm equipped as Standard:LED turned on when load current
exceeds pre-alarm setting current.
• Suitable for use as a main breaker:isolation comformity to IEC Standard.
Long time-delay Short time-delay Pre-alarm
operating time operating time current
Previous New
1 x 104 1 x 104 Switch
Ir Ir
Current setting Current setting with fuse
1 x 103 1 x 103 High-voltage fuse- High
voltage
Allowable short-time
Ip characteristics
TL
1 x 102 1 x 102 Low
Long-delay operating time voltage
Time (s)
Time (s)
Transformer
10 10 Pre-alarm
current NFB
Short-delay Short-delay (electronic)
Is tripping current Is tripping current M
1 1 Short-delay Load
Load current operating time
Ts
0.1 0.1 Ii Instantaneous tripping current
0.01 0.01 Current-converted value

Current (A) Current (A) on the high-voltage side
4
Reliable High reliability, Best performance
■ Technology for WS Series
Relay Mechanism Breaking Performance

• Relay-unit Thermal type & Electronic type • Isolation suitability • Increased lcu
• AC/DC common use • Class ll insulation • High voltage
• Thermal adjustable range is expanded. • Increased operating cycles • Ics=100% lcu
JPT
Terminal
• IP20 Mold-cover Finger
protection
• Front compression terminal
⇔ Box terminal ⇔ Rear ⇔
PM
Internal Accessories Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer External Accessories

• Cassette-type accessories • Electric operators
• Wide range of Rated Voltage High speed type
Isolation suitability
• IP20 PM with Safety Device
• Handle Lock Device
• R/V handle
• IP40 Terminal cover
[PA Auto-Puffer] [JPT]

Adopted on SGW,
Polymer Ablation type Auto-Puffer [ HGW, RGW, UGW ] Jet Pressure Trip Mechanism [Adopted on SGW,
HGW, RGW, UGW]
[Advanced ISTAC]
Advanced Impulsive Slot-Type Accelerator [Adopted
RGW, UGW
on SGW,HGW,
]
[Shunt-less]
Shunt-less Current Flow Technology [Adopted on SGW,
HGW, RGW, UGW]
Double plates conductors hold the movable conductor without Movable contact
flexible wires. This shunt-less structure achieves the increased Holder
operating cycles.
Endurance (times)
50,000
(C-O cycles) Electrical Mechanical
40,000
30,000
20,000 Spring
10,000 Movable contact
revolving shaft
0
NF125-SGW/HGW NF160-SGW/HGW NF250-SGW/HGW During revolution the movable contact is constantly
in contact with the holder, maintaining current flow.
5
W o r l d S u p e r
Series
■ Best performance of SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW
Breaking Capacity lcu/lcs 200

Max. let-through peak current (kA) (400VAC)
100 Prospective short-circuit

80 current asym. peak
Max. peak current (kA)

60 NF250-HGW
(kA) 200 200 200 40
200 200 200
200 20
10 NF250-UGW
8
6
125 125 125

4
150 125 125 125 2
100 1
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
100
85 75 I2t let-through characteristics (400VAC)
75 (106) 10
8
70 6
65 4 NF250-HGW
50 50 30
MAX. I2t (A2• s)

2
36 36 25
36 36
1
0.8
30 20 U(UGW) 0.6
0.4
0 R(RGW)
230VAC 0.2 NF250-UGW
380VAC 400VAC 8 H(HGW)
415VAC 0.1
S(SGW) Series
0.08
440VAC
500VAC 0.06
690VAC 0.04
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
■ 2 types of Relay for SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW
Thermal Adjustable Relay

MODEL
200
6 8 160 250
RT 250 Rating ln(A) 25 40 63 100 125 160 250
ln 250 A
4 10 50/60Hz
NF250-SGW/HGW
li(DC)=1.3Xli(AC) MADE IN JAPAN
lr(A)
li(X250A AC) lr li 3P3E LN326N433-1
Type NF160-SGW/HGW
Hi
NF125-SGW/HGW
Lo
T
Overload Protection (Thermal)
Tripping threshold lr (A) 16-25 25-40 40-63 63-100 80-125 125-160 160-250
No Protection
Neutral protection(note 1) 4P3E
4P4E 1 lr
Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic)

Fixed Adjustable
Tripping threshold li
10ln (AC), 13ln (DC) 4 to 10ln (AC), 5.2 to 13ln(DC) Thermal type unit
Note: (1) The type 4P3E is standard. If the type 4P4E is required, specify the type 4P4E separately and explicitly.
lr li l
Rating ln(A) (40C)

Electronic Relay NF250-SGW/HGW
32 63 100 125 160 250
NF160-SGW/HGW
Type
LN326N429-11 MODEL
T Ir Hi
MADE IN JAPAN
RE250 ln 250 A
Ip
TL Is NF125-SGW/HGW
AC only 50/60Hz Ts
Ii 70% PAL OVER Lo
Ir (A) TEST T L(s) Is (XIr) Ts (s) Ip (XIr) I pN
I
200 80 4 5 6 2 Ii (X250A) 8 10 8.5 9
60 3.5 1 8 4P3E 4P4E
160 3 7 6
2.5 8
12 7.5 9.5
Overload Protection
125 250 12 100 2 10 0.6 3 4 14 7 10
Tripping threshold lr (A) 16-32 32-63 63-100 75-125 80-160 125-250
Tripping time TL(s) 12-60-80-100 step adjustable (at 2 lr)
LTD
Neutral protection (Slectable) 0-1 lr (Step adjustable)
T lr Short-Circuit Protection
lp Pickup current ls 2-2.5-3-3.5-4-5-6-7-8-10 lr step adjustable
STD
Tripping time Ts(s) 0.06-0.1-0.2-0.3 step adjustable (at 1.5 ls)
INST Tripping threshold li 4 to 14 ln continuous adjustable
TL ls Pre-Alarm (for Indication)

Pickup current lp 0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0 lr step adjustable
PAL
Operating time Tp TL/2
Ts li Electronic type unit

Indicator (LED)
70%-LED (green) Lights at 0.7 lr
PAL-LED (orange) Flashs at lp and Lights at over Tp
l Over-LED (red) Lights at 1.15 lr
6
Best Solution Plenty of Accessories, Easy installation
Internal Accessories
Internal accessories become easier to use by adopting a cassette type. 3 Way Lead Wire (Selectable)
Common use of different voltages realizes the major reduction in types.
The UVT for ELCB is also available. Time delay type variations have
also been expanded, offering a wide range of applications.
Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SHT)
Previous models WS Series (New)

(24), (48), 100-120, 200-240,
AC (V) 24-48, 100-240, 380-550
380-450, (440-550)
SHT
voltuge
DC (V) (12), (24), (36), (48), 100, (110), (125), (220) 12, 24-36, 36-48, 100-125, 220-250
100-110, (100-120), 200-220, (220-240), 24/48, 100-110/120-130, 200-220/230-250,

AC (V)
UVT (380-415), 400-440, (440-480), (500-550) 380-415/440-480, 500-550/690
voltuge
DC (V) (24), (48), 100, (110) 24/48, 100/110, 110/125
Lead-wire to Line side Flying Lead-wire
Cassette-type Accessories
Cassette-type accessories give greater flexbility when
upgrading circuits.
Easier ordering and one-touch simple installation become
possible. The insulation function increases its safety.
Fits all breaker series
The alarm switch (AL), auxiliary switch (AX), shunt trip (SHT),
and undervoltage trip (UVT) all come as cassette-type 1.Push the trip button 2.Loosen the front 3.Open the front 4.Install the 5.Close the front cover
(PTT) cover screws cover accessories and tighten the screws.
accessories to suit all breaker series.
Power Supply Module

External Accessories
Hight-speed Motor Device
Motor devices for 125-250AF become easier to use:contributing to the
simple installation.
Adoption of a spring charge mechanism for high-speed operation
(0.05~0.1seconds)
Swift and simple installation by tightening only two screws.
External Handle
Adoption of a safer and easy to operate handle.
Complying with protection degree IP65.
Isolation function achieved through combination with the breaker unit.
Structured to allow relay adjustments after installation as well.
Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent false operation.
V-Handle R-Handle
IP-20PM with Safety Device

[Adopted on SGW, HGW]
Specialized for 3-and4-pole use (2 pole incompatible).
Complies with the protection degree IP20.
Safety device supplied as an option.
May be connected with up to nine leads (for PLT).
May be modified from front connection to rear connection.
(Note: Modification by end users not authorized)
IP20: Finger protection. (IP-20PM)
7
W o r l d S u p e r
Series
Product design which pursues greater ease of use by wide variations

IP-20 Terminal Connection Terminal Cover
With the SGW, HGW, Major improvements have been achieved
connection safety has been in front connection terminal safety.
increased. With terminal covers, IP40 protection
Standard IP-20 protection degree is ensured.
degree ensured. (Type “SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”)
Variable Connections IEC Rail Mounting for 32, 63AF

Compatible with various The 32,63AF includes
connection methods. installation hooks to IEC rails,
Solderless terminals are greatly simplifying installation
now built inside the works.
breaker contrary to the
conventional style where
terminals were built
outside.
Maximum connecting Cable of 185mm2 (SGW/HGW).
(Note: Certain models have externally attached terminals)
Handle Locks
With the WS Series, ON/OFF locking is
possible with the padlock.
Up to three padlocks may be attached.
Customers are requested their own
padlocks. ON Lock OFF Lock
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock

(Type “SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”)
Intelligent Measuring and communicating

• MDU (Measuring Display Unit) with NF 250-800AF
• Small and white measuring unit
• Measuring data can be transmitted to PC or PLC through CC-Link
• AL / AX with CC-Link transmission
• Improved accuracy(Electric energy): ±2.5% of rated value → ±2.5% of true value
By using various application software for PLC, users can also connect to the network
Personal SCADA system.
Computer
MELSECNET/10
Interface card MELSECNET/10
CC-Link®
Interface I/O Unit

Unit
PLC
Eco Monitor Pro ME110S
MDU
AE-SW
8
Product Skelton
16
10
22
17
23
18
24
19
20
5 4
21
10
9
W o r l d S u p e r
Series
1 MCCB
2 Relay unit (Thermal type) (RT)*
3 Relay unit (Electronic type) (RE)*
4 Relay unit (Magnetic only type) (RM)*
5 Relay unit (Switch-disconnector type)*
11 12 13 6 Super current-limiting unit*

7 Solderless (BOX) terminals
8 Front connection nuts
9 Rear connections
10 Insulating barrier (BA-F)
11 Small terminal cover (TC-S)
12 Large terminal cover (TC-L)
13 Rear terminal cover (BTC)
14 Plug-in base (PM)
7 8 9 15 Connections for Plug-in
16 Mechanical interlock device (MI)
17 OFF Lock with 3 Padlock (HLF3)
18 Handle lock device (LC/HLF/HLN/HLS)
19 Variable-depth operating handle (V type)
20 Rotary operating handle (R type)
21 Electrical operation device (MD)
22 Alarm/Auxiliary switch device (AL/AX)
23 Under voltage trip device (UVT)
6
24 Shunt trip device (SHT)
Note *: All the accessories are field mounting type

except No.2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
15 14
7 8 9 3 2
11 12 13
10
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models
Series Configuration
Molded-case circuit breakers
NF-C NF-S NF-H NF-U

Economy type Standard type High-performance Current limiting-type
type ultra breaker
Earth-leakage circuit breakers
NV-C NV-S NV-H NV-U

High-performance Ultra current-limiting
Economy type Standard type type type
Motor-protection breakers Circuit protectors
MB CP30-BA CP-B CP-S

Motor breaker For equipment
Miniature circuit breakers
BH BH-P BH-S BH-PS BH-D6 BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D

NEMA-type for consumer unit DIN-series for general consumer unit
11
1
List of Product Models

Frame A
Series
32 (30) 63 125 (100) 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
NF-C NF30-CS NF63-CW NF125-CW NF250-CW NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW
Economy type
Molded-case circuit breaker
NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

NF-S NF63-SW NF1000-SEW
Standard type NF125-SGW NF160-SGW NF250-SGW NF400-SEW NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
NF32-SW
NF-H NF125-HW NF160-HW NF250-HW NF400-HEW NF630-HEW NF800-HEW
High-performance type
NF63-HW
NF125-HGW NF160-HGW NF250-HGW NF400-REW NF630-REW NF800-REW
NF-U NF125-RGW NF250-RGW

Ultra current-limiting type
NF400-UEW NF800-UEW NF1250-UR
NF125-UGW NF250-UGW
NV-C NV30-CS NV63-CW NV125-CW NV250-CW NV400-CW NV630-CW
Economy type
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
NV250-SW NV400-SW NV630-SW

NV-S NV63-SW NV125-SW NV800-SEW
Standard type NV250-SEW NV400-SEW NV630-SEW
NV-H NV32-SW
High-performance type NV250-HW NV400-HEW
NV63-HW NV125-HW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
NV250-HEW NV400-REW
NV-U NV125-RW NV250-RW

Ultra current-limiting type
Motor-protection
MB30-CS MB50-CW
MB
breaker
Motor breaker MB100-SW MB225-SW

MB30-SW MB50-SW
Frame A
UL listed products Series 50 100 150 225 250 400 600
UL489 Listed NF100-CWU NF-SJW
NF-UL NV-UL Molded-case circuit breaker
NF50-SWU
NF100-SWU
NF-SFW NF225-CWU
NF-HJW
NF-SKW NF-SLW
Earth-leakage protector
products
UL489 Listed
UL listed
UL489 Listed Earth-leakage protector

Molded-case circuit breaker UL489 Listed NV50-SWU NV100-SWU NV225-CWU NV-SKW
( Details will be available

upon request. )
( Detailsuponwillrequest.
be available
)
Miniature Circuit Breakers DIN Series Circuit Protectors

AF 60 100 AF 63 and less AF 30 and less
BH BH-D6
MCB CP30-BA
BH-DN
BH-P
BH RCCB BV-D CP CP-B
BH-S —
BH-PS — RCBO BV-DN CP-S
Isolating
switch KB-D
12
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series C series S series C series S series H series C series

Frame Size 30 32 63 63 63 125
Photo
Type name NF30-CS NF32-SW NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW NF125-CW
3 5 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 50 (60) 63 (75) 80
Rated current In (Amp.) 15 20 30 16 20 25 (30) 32 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60) 63 100 125
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500 600 600 600 690 600
690V – – – – 2.5/1 –
525V – – – – – –
500V – 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 7.5/4 7.5/4
Rated AC 440V – 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 (50/60Hz) 415V 1.5/1.5 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
breaking (Icu/Ics) 400V 1.5/1.5 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
capacities (kA) 380V 1.5/1.5 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
230V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8 25/13 30/15
250V – 2.5/1 ✽4 – 2.5/1 ✽4 – 7.5/4 ✽4 – 7.5/4 ✽4 – 7.5/4 ✽1
DC
300V – – – – – –
Suitability for isolation – ● ● ● ● ●
Utilization category A A A A A A
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) – ● ● ● ● ●
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 4 6 6 6 6 8
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 3
without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 15,000 15,000 10,000
440V-In/2 6,000 (415V) 6,000 6,000 15,000 15,000 6,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-In 6,000 (415V) 6,000 6,000 8,000 8,000 6,000
with current
690V-In/2 – – – – – –
690V-In – – – – –- –
a ca a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 50 75 100 50 75 100 60 90
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 96 130 130 130 130 130
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.4 0.55 0.45 0.6 0.45 0.6 0.7 0.45 0.6 0.7 0.65 0.9
Screw terminal ● ● ● ● ● ●
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) – – – – – ●
Fixed
Busbar terminal – – – – – –
Installation
and Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ● ●
connections Rear (PM) – ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – – – –
IEC 35mm Mounting hook (option) – ● ● ● ● –
rail Adapter (option) ● – – – – ●
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) – ● ● ● ● ●
(option) ✽ 5
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) – ● ● ● ● ●
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) – – – – – ●
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ● ● ●
connection with Internal terminal type (INT) – – – – – –
(option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL) – – – – – –
accessories Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL) – – – – – –
(option) Cylinder key lock Available soon – – – – – ●
(S) ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) – ● ● ● – ● – ●
Waterproof (W) – – ● – ● – ● – – ● – – ●
Electrical operation device (MD) – – – – – – ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) – ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL-S) – ● ● ● ● ●
Lock cover (LC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
External
accessories (V) – – ● – ● – ● – ● – ●
External Door mounting
(option) (S) – ● ● ● ● ●
operating
handle (R) – – – – – ●
Mounted on breaker
(F) – ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) – ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) – ● ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Small (TC-S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
for plug-in (PTC) – ● ● ● ● ●
L/R ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
G/L – ● ● ● – ● – ●
Marine approval BV – ● ● ● – ● – ●
DNV – ● ● ● – ● – ●
ABS ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Thermal-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Trip button – Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes ✽ 1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used Line Line
for up to 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 500V DC.
✽ 2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
✽ 3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
✽ 4: Specify if for DC use. Load Load
✽ 5: Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF30-CS. 3-pole 4-pole
13
S series H series U series
125 125 125
NF125-SW
NF125-SGW
RT
NF125-SGW
RE NF125-HW
NF125-HGW
RT
NF125-HGW
RE
NF125-RGW
RT
NF125-UGW
RT
2
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 16–25 25–40 40–63 16–32 32–63 63–100 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 16–25 25–40 40–63 16–32 32–63 63–100 16–25 25–40 16–25 25–40
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 63–100 80–125 75–125 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 63–100 80–125 75–125 40–63 63–100 40–63 63–100
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 2 3 4
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
8/4 8/8 8/8 10/5 20/20 20/20 25/25 30/30
18/5 22/22 22/22 22/11 35/35 35/35 125/125 200/200
18/9 30/30 30/30 30/15 50/50 50/50 125/125 200/200
25/13 36/36 36/36 50/25 65/65 65/65 125/125 200/200
30/15 36/36 36/36 50/25 70/70 70/70 125/125 200/200
30/15 36/36 36/36 50/25 75/75 75/75 125/125 200/200
30/15 36/36 36/36 50/25 75/75 75/75 125/125 200/200
50/25 85/85 85/85 100/50 100/100 100/100 125/125 200/200
15/8 ✽1 – – 40/20 ✽1 – – – –
– 20/20 ✽ 2 – – 40/40 ✽ 2 – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A A A A A A A A
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
25,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000
20,000 40,000 40,000 20,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 40,000
10,000 30,000 30,000 10,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
60 90 120 105 140 105 140 90 120 105 140 105 140 105 105 140
130 165 165 130 165 165 240 240
68 86 86 68 86 86 86 86
90 110 110 90 110 110 110 110
0.7 0.95 1.3 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 0.8 0.95 1.3 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 3.1 3.1 3.9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● – – ● ● –
– ● ● – ● ● – –
– – – – – – – – – –
● – – – ● – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● – ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – ● – – ● – –
– – ● – – ● – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – – ● – – – – –
● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – – –
● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – – –
– ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● ● ● – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal-
magnetic magnetic Electronic magnetic magnetic
magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
14
Series S series H series

Frame Size 160 160
Photo
Type name NF160-SW NF160-SGW NF160-SGW NF160-HW NF160-HGW NF160-HGW

RT RE RT RE
Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 160 125–160 80–160 125 150 160 125–160 80–160

Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
690V – 8/8 8/8 5/3 20/20 20/20
525V – 22/22 22/22 – 35/35 35/35
500V 15/8 30/30 30/30 30/8 50/50 50/50
Rated AC 440V 25/13 36/36 36/36 50/13 65/65 65/65
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 (50/60Hz) 415V 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/13 70/70 70/70
breaking (Icu/Ics) 400V 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/13 75/75 75/75
capacities (kA) 380V 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/13 75/75 75/75
230V 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/25 100/100 100/100
DC 250V 15/8 ✽ 1 – – 40/20 ✽ 1 – –
300V – 20/20 ✽ 2 – – 40/40 ✽ 2 –
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ● ● ●
Utilization category A A A A A A
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 8 8 6 8 8
Pollution degree 2 3 3 2 3 3
without current 12,000 40,000 40,000 12,000 40,000 40,000
440V-In/2 4,000 30,000 30,000 4,000 30,000 30,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-In 4,000 20,000 20,000 4,000 20,000 20,000
with current
690V-In/2 – 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
690V-In – 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
a ca a 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140
c
b c 68 86 86 68 86 86
ca 92 110 110 92 110 110
Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Fixed
Busbar terminal – – – – – –
Installation
and Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ● ●
connections Rear (PM) ● – – ● – –
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – ● ● – ● ●
IEC 35mm Mounting hook (option) – – – – – –
rail Adapter (option) – – – – – –
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ● ● ●
(option)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) ● – – ● – –
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) – ● ● – ● ●
connection with Internal terminal type (INT) – ● ● – ● ●
(option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL) – – ● – – ●
accessories Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL) – – ● – – ●
(option) Cylinder key lock Available soon – ● ● – ● ●
(S) ● – – – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● –
Waterproof (W) ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● –
Electrical operation device (MD) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ● ●
(HL-S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
External
accessories (V) ● ● ● ● ● ●
(option) (S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
operating
handle (R) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Mounted on breaker
(F) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● – – ● – –
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Small (TC-S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal
for plug-in (PTC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
L/R – – – – – –
G/L – – – – – –
Marine approval BV – – – – – –
DNV – – – – – –
ABS – – – – – –
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Thermal-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic Electronic
magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes ✽ 1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used Line Line
Load Load
3-pole 4-pole
15
C series S series H series U series
250 250 250 250
NF250-CW NF250-SW NF250-SGW

RT
NF250-SGW
RE
NF250-HW NF250-HGW
RT
NF250-HGW
RE
NF250-RGW
RT
NF250-UGW
RT
2
(100) 125 150 175 (100) 125 150 175 125–160 160–250 125 150 175 125–160
200 225 250 200 225 250 125–250 125–250 125–160 160–225 125–160 160–225
200 225 250 160–250
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 2 3 4
600 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
– – 8/8 8/8 5/3 20/20 20/20 25/25 30/30
– – 22/22 22/22 – 35/35 35/35 125/125 –
10/5 15/8 30/30 30/30 30/8 50/50 50/50 125/125 200/200
15/8 25/13 36/36 36/36 50/13 65/65 65/65 125/125 200/200
18/9 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/13 70/70 70/70 125/125 200/200
18/9 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/13 75/75 75/75 125/125 200/200
18/9 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/13 75/75 75/75 125/125 200/200
35/18 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/25 100/100 100/100 125/125 200/200
10/5 ✽1 15/8 ✽ 1 – – 40/20 ✽1 – – – –
– – 20/20 ✽ 2 – – 40/40 ✽ 2 – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A A A A A A A A A
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6 6 8 8 6 8 8 8 8
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
8,000 12,000 25,000 25,000 12,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
4,000 4,000 15,000 15,000 4,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
4,000 4,000 10,000 10,000 4,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
– – 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
– –- 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
105 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 105 140
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 240 240
68 68 86 86 68 86 86 86 86
92 92 110 110 92 110 110 110 110
1.3 1.5 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 3.1 3.1 3.9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● – – ● – – ● ● –
– – ● ● – ● ● – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● – – ● – – – –
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – ● – – ● – –
– – – ● – – ● – –
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ●
● ● – – – – – – – –
● ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – – –
● ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● – – ● – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
– – ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Thermal-
magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
16
Series C series S series H series

Frame Size 400 400 400 400
Photo
Type name NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW
250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 200~400 200~400 200~400
Rated current In (Amp.) adjustable adjustable adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690
690V – 10/10(5/5) ✽1 10/10(5/5) ✽1 35/18 –
500V 15/8 30/30(25/25) ✽1 30/30(25/25) ✽1 50/50 70/35
Rated 440V 25/13 42/42(36/36) ✽1 42/42(36/36) ✽1 65/65 125/63
AC
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 (50/60Hz) 415V 36/18 45/45(36/36) ✽1 50/50(36/36) ✽1 70/70 125/63
breaking (Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 45/45(36/36) ✽1 50/50(36/36) ✽1 70/70 125/63
capacities (kA) 380V 40/20 50/50(42/42) ✽1 50/50(42/42) ✽1 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 85/85(65/65) ✽1 85/85(65/65) ✽1 100/100 150/75
DC 250V 20/10 ✽4 40/40 ✽4 – – –
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ● ●
Utilization category A A B B B
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA) – – 5 5 5
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) ● ● ● ● ●
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 8
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
a ca a 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 140
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 257 257 257 257 257
b c 103 103 103 103 103
ca 134 155 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 4.7 5.5 4.9 5.7 7.5 6.5 8.3 6.5 8.3 6.5
Screw terminal – – – – –
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● – –
Installation Fixed
Busbar terminal ● ● ● ● ●
and
connections Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ●
Rear (PM) ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – – –
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ● ●
(option)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) ● ● ● ● ●
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) ● ● ● ● ●
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ● ●
connection with Internal terminal type (INT) – – – – –
(option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL) – – ● ✽2 ● ✽2 ● ✽2
accessories Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL) – – – – –
(option) Trip indicator (TI) – – ● ● ●
(S) – – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● ● – ● – – –
Waterproof (W) ● ● – ● – – –
Motor-
Electrical operated type (MD) ● ● ● ● ●
operation
Spring-
device
charge type
(MDS) ● ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ●
(HL-S) ● ● ● ● ●
External Lock cover (LC) – – – – –
accessories
(option) (V) ● ● ● ● ●
(S) ● ● ● ● ●
operating
handle (R) ● ● ● ● ●
Mounted on breaker
(F) ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● – –
Small (TC-S) – – – – –
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● – ● –
for plug-in (PTC) ● ● – ● – ● – ●
L/R ● ● – ● – ● – ●
G/L ● ● – ● – ● – ●
Marine approval BV ● ● – ● – ● – ●
DNV – – – ● – – – –
ABS ● ● – ● – ● – ●
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes ✽ 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ).
✽ 2: Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is Line Line
necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
Load Load
3-pole 4-pole
17
U series C series S series H series
400 630 630 630 630
NF400-UEW NF630-CW NF630-SW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW

2
200~400 500 600 630 500 600 630 300~630 300~630 300~630
adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
40 40 40 40 40 40
3 4 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
690 690 690 690 690 690
– – 10/10 10/10 35/18 –
170/170 18/9 30/30 30/30 50/50 70/35
200/200 36/18 42/42 42/42 65/65 125/63
200/200 36/18 50/50 50/50 70/70 125/63
200/200 36/18 50/50 50/50 70/70 125/63
200/200 40/20 50/50 50/50 70/70 125/63
200/200 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/100 150/75
– 20/10 ✽4 40/40 ✽4 – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
B A A B B B
5 – – 7.6 7.6 7.6
● ● ● ● ● ●
8 8 8 8 8 8
3 3 3 3 3 3
140 280 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 140
297 322 257 257 257 257 257
200 103 103 103 103 103
252 155 155 155 155 155
16.7 26.1 5.2 6.0 5.4 6.2 8.0 6.5 8.3 6.5 8.3 6.5
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ✽2 – – ● ✽2 ● ✽2 ● ✽2
– – – – – –
● – – ● ● ●
– – – – – –
– ● ● – ● – – –
– ● ● – ● – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
– ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
– ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● – ● – ● – ●
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
– – – – – ● – – – –
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
Electronic Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic
magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
18

Frame Size 800 800 800
Photo
Type name NF800-CEW NF800-SDW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW
400~800 (700) 800 400~800 400~800 400~800

Rated current In (Amp.) adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 3 2 3 4 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 – 690 690 690
690V – – 10/10 15/15 –
500V 18/9 – 30/30 50/50 70/35
Rated AC 440V 36/18 – 42/42 65/65 125/63
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 (50/60Hz) 415V 36/18 – 50/50 70/70 125/63
breaking (Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 – 50/50 70/70 125/63
capacities (kA) 380V 40/20 – 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 – 85/85 100/100 150/75
DC 250V – 40/40 ✽4 – – –
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ● ●
Utilization category B A B B B
Rated short-time withstand current low (kA) 9.6 – 9.6 9.6 9.6
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) ● ● ● ● ●
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 8
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
a ca a 210 210 210 280 210 280 210
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 275 275 275 275 275
b c 103 103 103 103 103
ca 155 155 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 10.9 9 10.9 14.2 10.9 14.2 10.9
Screw terminal – – – – –
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● – –
Installation Fixed
Busbar terminal ● ● ● ● ●
and
connections Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ●
Rear (PM) ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – – –
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ● ●
(option) ✽5
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) ● ● ● ● ●
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) ● ● ● ● ●
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ● ●
connection with Internal terminal type (INT) – – – – –
(option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL) ● ✽2 – ● ✽2 ● ✽2 ● ✽2
accessories Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL) – – – – –
(option) Trip indicator (TI) ● – ● ● ●
(S) – – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● ● ● – – –
Waterproof (W) ● ● ● – – –
Motor-
Electrical operated type (MD) ● ● ● ● ●
operation
Spring-
device
charge type
(MDS) ● ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ●
(HL-S) ● ● ● ● ●
External Lock cover (LC)
accessories – – – – –
(option) (V) ● ● ● ● ●
(S) ● ● ● ● ●
operating
handle (R) ● ● ● ● ●
Mounted on breaker
(F) ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ●
Small (TC-S) – – – – –
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● ● ●
for plug-in (PTC) – – – – –
L/R ● – ● – ● – ●
G/L ● – ● – ● – ●
Marine approval BV ● – ● – ● – ●
DNV ● – ● – – – –
ABS ● – ● – ● – ●
Electronic Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping device magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes ✽ 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ).
✽ 2: Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is
necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
✽ 4: Specify if for DC use.
✽ 5: Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF1000-SW,
NF1250-SW, NF1250-SDW, NF1600-SW, and NF1600-SDW.
19
U series S series
800 1000 1250 1600
NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SEW NF1600-SDW

2
400~800 500~1000 600~1250 1000 1250 800~1600 1600
adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
40 40 40 40 40 40
3 4 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2
690 690 690 690 690 690
35/35 25/13 25/13 – 25/13 –
170/170 65/33 65/33 – 65/33 –
200/200 85/43 85/43 – 85/43 –
200/200 85/43 85/43 – 85/43 –
200/200 85/43 85/43 – 85/43 –
200/200 85/43 85/43 – 85/43 –
200/200 125/63 125/63 – 125/63 –
– – – 40/20 ✽4 – 40/20 ✽4
● ● ● ● ● ●
B B B A B A
9.6 20 20 – 20 –
● ● ● ● ● ●
8 8 8 8 8 8
3 3 3 3 3 3
210 280 210 280 210 280 210 210 280 210
322 406 406 406 406 406
200 140 140 140 140 140
252 190 190 190 190 190
27.6 33.7 23.5 30.7 23.5 30.7 22 34.5 41.2 32
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – ● ● – – –
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ✽2 ● ✽2 ● ✽2 – ● ✽2 –
– – – – – –
● – – – – –
– – – – – –
– ● – ● – ● – –
– ● – ● – ● – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – – – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
● – – – – –
– – – – – –
– ● – ● – – – –
– ● – ● – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– ● – ● – – – –
Electronic Electronic Electronic Thermal- Electronic Magnetic
magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
20
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Series C series S series C series S series H series C series

Frame size 30 32 63 63 63 125
Photo
Type name NV30-CS NV32-SW NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW NV125-CW

5 10 15 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (15) 16 20 25 (30) (60) 63 (75) 80
Rated current In (Amp.) 20 30 20 25 (30) 32 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60) 63 100 125
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) ✽6 100–230 Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500
High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30 Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
– – – – – 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s) – – – – –
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) – – – – – (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button Button Button Button
AC440V – 5/2 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V – 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC230V 2.5/2 10/5 7.5/4 15/8 25/13 30/15
without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 15,000 15,000 10,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-In/2 6,000 (230V) 6,000 6,000 15,000 15,000 6,000
with current
440V-In 6,000 (230V) 6,000 6,000 8,000 8,000 6,000
a ca a 67.5 75 75 75 75 90
c
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.4 0.6 0.65 0.65 0.65 1.0
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) – – – – – ●
Fixed
Busbar terminal – ● ● ● ● ●
Installation and Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ● ●
connections Rear (PM) – ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – – – –
IEC 35mm Mounting hook (option) – ● ● ● ● –
rail Adapter (option) ● – – – – ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) – – – – – –
(option) ✽2 ● ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N) –
Synchronous closing (UVT-S) – – – – – ●
Insulation switch (MG) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL) – ● ● ● ● ●
accessories Test button module (TBM) – ● ● ● ● ●
(option) Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL) – – – – – –
Cylinder key lock Available soon – – – – – ●
connection (option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ● ●
(S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) – ● ● ● ● ●
Waterproof (W) – ● ● ● ● ●
Electrical operation device (MD) – – – – – ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) – ● ● ● ● ●
Handle lock
(HL) – ● ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device (HL-S) – ● ● ● ● ●
External (V) – ● ● ● ● ●
accessories (S) – ● ● ● ● ●
(option) operating
handle (R) – – – – – ●
Mounted on breaker
(F) – ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) – ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) – ● ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Small (TC-S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal
for plug-in (PTC) – ● ● ● ● ●
Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Thermal-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped ✽5 Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
CE marking ✽7 – 䉭䉭䉭䉭䉭
Note ✽ 1: 125A rated current is 3p only.
✽ 2: Cassette-type aaccessories are not acceptable for NV30-CS.
✽ 3: Standard type is thus SLT equipped. Rated operational voltage Available voltage range
✽ 4: In case of ampere rating 15A and 16A, time-delay type is not available. 100 - 230V 80~253V
✽ 5: Included in AL (type) only.
100 - 440V 80~484V
✽ 6: Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
✽ 7: Specify if for CE marking. In case of the CE marking article of 250A Frame or less, outside sizes differ.
200 - 440V 160~484V
21
S series H series U series C series S series H series U series
125 125 125 250 250 250 250
NV125-SW NV125-HW NV125-RW NV250-CW NV250-SW NV250-SEW NV250-HW NV250-HEW NV250-RW

2
✽4 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 ✽4 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 ✽4 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125–225 125 150 175 125–225 125 150 175
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 ✽1 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 200 225
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
3 4 3 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 100–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 100–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 (30) 100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 (30) 100 •200 •500 (30) 100 •200 •500 (30) 100 •200 •500 (30) 100 •200 •500 (30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
(0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button
25/13 50/25 125/125 15/8 25/13 25/13 50/13 50/13 125/125
30/15 50/25 125/125 18/9 30/15 30/15 50/13 50/13 125/125
50/25 100/50 125/125 35/18 50/25 50/25 100/25 100/25 125/125
25,000 25,000 25,000 8,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000
20,000 20,000 20,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
10,000 10,000 10,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
90 120 90 120 90 105 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105
130 130 191 165 165 165 165 165 240
68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
90 90 90 92 92 92 92 92 92
1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4 1.8 1.7 1.7 2.1 1.8 2.3 1.7 2.1 1.8 2.3 3.5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
● – ● – – – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
● ● ● – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3
● ● ● ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3 ● ✽3
– – – – – ● ✽3 – ● ✽3 –
● ● ● – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● – – ● ● – ● – – – –
● – ● – – ● ● – ● – ● – ● – –
● – ● – – ● ● – ● – ● – ● – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● – ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● – ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● – ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● – ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Electronic Thermal-
magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
䉭䉭䉭䉭䉭 – 䉭 – 䉭
22

Frame size 400 400 400
Photo
Type name NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV400-HEW
Rated current In (Amp.) 250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 200~400 adjustable 200~400 adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40
100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) ✽3
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button Button
AC440V 25/13 42/42(36/36) ✽1 42/42(36/36) ✽1 65/65
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics) AC400V 36/18 45/45(36/36) ✽1 50/50(36/36) ✽1 70/70
AC230V 50/25 85/85(65/65) ✽1 85/85(65/65) ✽1 100/100
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ●
a ca a 140 140 140 185 140 185
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 257 257 257 257
b c 103 103 103 103
ca 134 155 155 155
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 6.1 6.4 7.1 8.9 7.1 8.9
Screw terminal – – – –
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● –
Fixed
Installation and Busbar terminal ● ● ● ●
connections Rear (B) ● ● ● ●
Rear (PM) ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – –
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ●
(option) ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous closing (UVT-S) ● ● ● ●
Insulation switch (MG) ● ● ● ●
Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL) ● ● ● ●
Built-in Test button module (TBM) ● ● ● ●
accessories Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL) – ● ✽2 ● ✽2
(option) –
Overcurrent trip alarm ✽3 (OAL) – – – –
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ●
connection (option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ●
(S) – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● ● ● – –
Waterproof (W) ● ● ● – –
Electrical operation device (MD) ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ●
Handle lock
(HL) ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device (HL-S) ● ● ● ●
Lock cover (LC) – – – –
External (V) ● ● ● ●
accessories (S) ● ● ● ●
(option) operating
handle (R) ● ● ● ●
Mounted on breaker
(F) ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● –
Small (TC-S) – – – –
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● – ●
for plug-in (PTC) ● ● ● ●
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
CE marking ✽4 䉭䉭䉭䉭
Note ✽ 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / )
✽ 2: Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if order output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
✽ 3: Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V. Rated operational voltage Available voltage range
✽ 4: Specify if for CE marking. 100 - 440V 80~484V
200 - 440V 160~484V
23
H series C series S series H series S series H series
400 630 630 630 800 800
NV400-REW NV630-CW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

2
200~400 adjustable 500 600 630 500 600 630 300~630 adjustable 300~630 adjustable 400~800 adjustable 400~800 adjustable
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3
100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
0.04 – – – – – –
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
(0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) 0.1• 0.5 • 1.0 (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) 0.1• 0.5 • 1.0 (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0)
Button Button Button Button Button Button Button
125/63 36/18 42/42 42/42 65/65 42/42 65/65
125/63 36/18 50/50 50/50 70/70 50/50 70/70
150/75 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
140 140 140 140 185 140 210 210
257 257 257 257 257 275 275
103 103 103 103 103 103 103
155 155 155 155 155 155 155
7.1 6.9 6.9 7.1 8.9 7.1 15.3 15.3
– – – – – – –
– – – – – ● –
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ✽2 – – ● ✽2 ● ✽2 ● ✽2 ● ✽2
– – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – –
– ● ● ● – – ● –
– ● ● ● – – ● –
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● – ● ●
– – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – – – – –
Electronic Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic
magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
䉭䉭䉭䉭䉭䉭䉭
24
Motor-Protection Breakers
Frame A 30 50 100 225

Type name MB30-CS MB30-SW MB50-CW MB50-SW MB100-SW MB225-SW
200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V
A A 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V
kW kW kW kW A A A A
32 7.5 15 32 7.5 15 kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
25 5.5 11 25 5.5 11 100 – 55
45 11 22 7.1 1.5 – 225 55 110
16 3.7 7.5 16 3.7 7.5 90 22 45
Rated current In (Amp.) (12) – 5.5 12 – 5.5 40 – 18.5 5 – 2.2 200 – –
71 18.5 37
Rated motor capacity: kW 10 2.2 – 10 2.2 –
32 7.5 15 4 0.75 1.5 63 15 30 175 45 90
(8) – 3.7 8 – 3.7
7.1 1.5 – 7.1 1.5 – 25 5.5 11 2.5 0.4 – 45 11 22 150 37 75
Reference ambient temperature 40°C (5) – 2.2 5 – 2.2 (40) – 19
16 3.7 7.5 2 – 0.75 125 30 –
(45°C for marine applications) 4 0.75 1.5 4 0.75 1.5
2.5 0.4 – 2.5 0.4 – 32 7.5 15
12 – 5.5 1.4 0.2 –
(2) – 0.75 2 – 0.75 (25) 5.5 11
1.4 0.2 – 1.4 0.2 – 10 2.2 – 1.2 – 0.4
(16) 3.7 7.5
(1.2) – 0.4 1.2 – 0.4 8 – 3.7 0.8 – – (12.5) – 5.5
(0.8) – – 0.8 – –
Number of poles 2 (for single phase) 3 3 3 3 3 3
circuit breaking
capacities (kA)
440V 1.5/1.5 (415V) 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 25/13 25/13

Rated short-
lEC 60947-2 30/15

AC 400V 1.5/1.5 (380V) 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 30/15
(lcu/lcs)
230V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8 50/25 50/25
a 45 67.5 75 75 75 90 105
dimensions
a ca
c
Overall
b 96 130 130 130 130 165

(mm)
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 92
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.95 1.5
● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact

Connection
Front connection (F) ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact

method
Rear connection (B) ● Round stud (assembled in) ● Round stud ● Round stud ● Round stud ● Flat stud ● Flat stud
Plug-in (PM) – ● ● ● ● ●
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.
25
UL Listed Products
Frame A 100 225 50 100 150 250 400 600

Type name NF100-CWU NF225-CWU NF50-SWU NF100-SWU NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW NF-SKW NF-SLW
Photo
2
Rated current In (Amp.) 50 60 75 125 150 175 (3) 5 10 15 15 20 30 15 20 30 40 50 (125) (150) 125 150 175 250 300
40 50 60 60 70 80 90 100 175 200 500 600
at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C) 100 200 225 20 30 40 50 75 100 110 125 150 225 250 200 225 250 350 400
Number of poles 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated voltage (V AC) 240 240 240 480Y/277 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
600Y/347V – – – – 14 14 18 20 20
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
UL 489 480V – – – – 35 35 50 35 35
AC
480Y/277V – – – 22 35 35 50 – –
240V 10 35 14 35 65 65 100 65 85
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V – – – 8/4 8/8 8/8 15/15 10/10 (5/5) (✽ 5) 10/10
500V 7.5/4 10/5 7.5/4 18/9 30/30 30/30 36/36 30/30 (25/25) (✽ 5) 30/30
440V 10/5 15/8 7.5/4 25/13 36/36 36/36 50/50 42/42 (36/36) (✽ 5) 42/42
JIS C 8201-2
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50 45/45 (36/36) (✽ 5) 45/45
(Icu/Ics)
400V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50 45/45 (36/36) (✽ 5) 45/45
380V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 (42/42) (✽ 5) 50/50
230V 30/15 35/18 15/8 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/100 85/85 (65/65) (✽ 5) 85/85
DC 250V ✽ 3 7.5/4 10/5 – 15/8 20/20 20/20 20/20 – –

Compatible to AC/DC ✽ 1 ● ● – ● ● ● ● – –
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Reverse connection ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
a 60 90 105 50 75 60 90 105 105 105 140 210
a ca
Overall c b 150 165 150 150 185 185 185 257 275
dimensions
(mm) b c 68 68 68 68 86 86 86 103 103
ca 90 92 90 90 110 110 110 155 155
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 0.7 0.95 1.5 0.45 0.6 0.7 0.95 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.7 9.6
Screw terminal (F) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – –

Connection
method
Front Solderless
connection terminal (box)
(SL) ● – – ● ● ● ● ● ●
Busbar terminal (BAR) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
✽2
Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Accessories
(option)
Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Under-voltage trip (UVT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device (HL) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
✽2
F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
External accessories
Operating handle S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(option)
V – ● ● – ● – ● ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating barrier (IB) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
cover Small (TC-S) – – ✽4 – – – – – – –
IEC 35mm rail fixture – – Supplied standardly – – – – – –
Thermal- Thermal- Hydraulic- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic adjustable magnetic adjustable magnetic magnetic adjustable
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
TÜV type approval ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Notes: ✽ 1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible to both AC and DC.
✽ 2 Specifications for products with a CE mark differ from those for general-purpose products. Details will Line
be available upon request.
✽ 3 Use two poles among the three poles in the case of three-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the
right allows the models of NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU and NF225-CWU to be used for up to 400 V DC and
the models of NF-SFW, NF-SJW, and NF-HJW to be used for up to 500 V DC.
✽ 4 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger protection) structure.
✽ 5 In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/). 3-pole Load
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.
The operating characteristics of breakers are different between AC and DC (JIS and IEC only).
26
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Type BH BH- P
Frame (A) 70 100 100 70 100 100
Photo
Rated current (A)

70 70,100 70,100 70 70,100 70,100
at ambient temperature 40° C
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
AC230/400V 3 — 3 —
Breaking capacity IEC 60898
AC400V — 3 — 3
(kA) sym.
— DC125V 1 1
Type of instantaneous operation Type C (5 In <, <10 In)
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c b 95 74
Dimensions
(mm)
b c 57.5 60.5
ca 77.5 79
Mass (kg) 0.16 0.32 0.48 0.13 0.26 0.38
Clamp terminal Plug- in (line) Clamp (load)
Connection ✳1
Automatic tripping device Thermal, magnetic
Terminal cover ● —
Mounting plate ● —
Optional
accessories
Terminal base — ●
Lock cover ● ●
Approved by — LR, GL, NK — — LR, BV, AB, GL, NK —
✳1. If reguired Solderless terminal can be supplied.

(BH : Line and Load side, BH-P : Load side only)
27
Type BH- S M 3 BH- S M 6
2
Photo
Rated current (A) 5,10,15,20,(25), 10,15,20,(25), 15,20,(25), 5,10,15,20,(25), 10,15,20,(25), 15,20,(25),

at ambient temperature 40°C 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60
AC 230/400 400 400 230/400 400 400

Rated voltage (V)
DC — 125 — — 125 —
AC230/400V 3 — 6 —
IEC 60898
Breaking capacity
AC400V — 3 — 6
(kA) sym.
— DC125V — 1 — — 1 —
Type of instantaneous operation Types B,C,D ✳2
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c
b 95 95
Dimensions
(mm) b c 57.5 57.5
ca 76 76
Mass (kg) 0.15 0.32 0.50 0.15 0.32 0. 50
Clamp terminal
Connection ✳1
Terminal cover ●
Mounting plate ●
Optional
accessories
Handle lock ●
Lock cover —
Approved by —
✳ 1. If required Solderless terminal can be supplied (Line and Load side)

✳ 2. Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
28
Type BH-PS M3 BH-PS M9
Photo
Rated current (A) 10,15,20, 10,15,20, 15,20, 6,10,16,20,(25), 10,16,20,(25), 10,16,20,(25),

at ambient temperature 40°C 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60 30,40,50,60 32,40,50,60 32,40,50,60 32,40,50,60
AC 230/400 400 400 230/400 400 400

Rated voltage (V)
DC — 125 — —
AC230/400V 3 — 9 —
IEC 60898
Breaking capacity
AC400V — 3 — 9
(kA) sym.
— DC125V — 1 — —
Type of instantaneous operation Types B,C,D ✳
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c
b 81.5 81.5
Dimensions
(mm) b c 60.5 60.5
ca 79 79
Mass (kg) 0.15 0.32 0.50 0.15 0.32 0.50
Plug- in (line) Clamp (load)
Connection
Terminal cover —
Terminal base ●
Optional
accessories
Lock cover —
Handle lock ●
Approved by — LR
✳ Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
29
MCB BH- D6 (IEC 60898) BH-DN (IEC 60898)
Photo
2
Number of poles 1 2 3 4 (3+N) 2 (1+N) 2 (1+N)
Rated current (A) 6,10,13,16,20,25 , 6,10,13,16,20,25, 6,10,13,16,20,25, 6 ,10,13,16,20,25, 6,10,13,16,20

6,10,16,20
at ambient temperature 30°C 32,40,50,63 32,40,50,63 32,40,50,63 32,40,50,63 25,32,40
Rated voltage (VAC) 230/ 400 400 400 400 230 230
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898) 6 4.5
Tripping characteristics Type B, C, D ✳ Type B, C ✳ Type C
ca a 18 36 54 72 36 18
a c
Dimensions b 87 88
(mm) b c 44 44
ca 70 70
Mass (kg) 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.6 0.30 0.12
Connection Solderless
Optional accessories Insulating barrier — 1 pc 2 pcs 3 pcs 1 pc —
, Type D (10In , 20In)
RCCB BV - D (IEC 61008) RCBO BV-DN (IEC 61009)
Photo Photo
Number of poles 2(1+N) 4(3+N) Number of poles 2 (1+N)

Rated current (A)
Rated current (A) 6,10,16,20,25,32
25, 40, 63 at ambient temperature 30°C
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC) 230
Rated voltage (VAC) 230 230/400 Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30,100,300
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30, 300 Max. operating time (s) at5I∆n 0.04
Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆ 0.04 Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC61009) 4.5
Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Tripping characteristics Type C ✳
Rated conditional short-circuit current (kA) 6 ca a
a c 36
ca a 36 72 DImension b 88
a c
b 85 (mm) b c 44
Dimensions
(mm) c 44 ca 70
b
Mass (kg) 0.19
ca 70
Mass (kg) 0.2 0.35 Automatic tripping device Thermal,magnetic
Connection solderless Option Over voltage release (280V±5%)
Isolating switch KB- D (IEC 60947-3)
Photo
Number of poles 1 2 3 4 (3+N)

Utilization category AC22A class
Rated current (A)

32, 63, 80
Rated voltage (VAC) 230 400

Short time withstand current (A) 20 ✕ In, 1s
Short-circuit making capacity (A) 20 ✕ In
ca a 18 36 54 72
a c
Dimensions b 87
(mm) b c 44
ca 70
Mass (kg) 0.09 0.18 0.27 0.36
Optional accessories Insulating barrier — 1 pc 2 pcs 3 pcs
30
ELRs and ZCTs
Earth-Leakage relays
Interchangeable leakage relay (Note 1)
Harmonic surge ready Harmonic surge ready
Type Electrical self-hold type Mechanical self-hold type
Electrical self-hold type Mechanical self-hold type
Hole diameter mm NV-ZBA NV-ZSA NV-ZHA NV-ZLA
15 ZT15B – ZT15B – ZT15B ZT15B
30 ZT30B – ZT30B – ZT30B ZT30B
Model name of ZCT combined 40 ZT40B – ZT40B – ZT40B ZT40B
(Note 5) 60 – ZT60B – ZT60B ZT60B ZT60B
80 – ZT80B – ZT80B ZT80B ZT80B
100 – ZT100B – ZT100B ZT100B ZT100B
Photo
Phase line type 3φ4W, 3φ3W, 1φ3W, 1φ2W

120 • 240 selectable
JIS 120 • 240 selectable – –
240 • 415 selectable
Control voltage AC V 120 • 240 selectable
UL/JIS (Note 2) 120 • 240 selectable
– – 240 • 440 selectable
UL/CE (Note 3) 240 • 440 selectable
480
High speed
30 30
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated sensitivity current mA 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
type
selectable selectable
selectable selectable
Max. operating time s 0.1 0.1
JIS – –
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
Rated sensitivity current mA 100 • 200 • 500 selectable
Delay
(200 • 500 • 1000 selectable)

type
Operating time s (Note 4) 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable
Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
Delay type speed • Delay speed
Rated sensitivity current mA 30 50 30 50

High High speed High
type
Max. operating time s 0.1 0.1

UL/JIS Rated sensitivity current mA – – 100 • 200 • 500 selectable 100 • 200 • 500 selectable
type
Max. operating time s (Note 4) 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s – • 0.1 • 0.5 – • 0.1 • 0.5
Rated sensitivity current mA 30 • 50 • 100 selectable 30 • 50 • 100 selectable
type
Max. operating time s at5I∆n 0.04 0.04

100 • 300 • 500 selectable 100 • 300 • 500 selectable
UL/CE Rated sensitivity current mA – –
300 • 500 • 1000 selectable 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
Max. operating time s at2I∆n (Note 4) 0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
Inertial non-operating time s at2I∆n 0.1 • 0.5 0.1 • 0.5
Earth-leakage indication Electric type (LED) Mechanical type (button) Electric type (LED) Mechanical type (button)
Push button or control power Push button Push button or control power Push button
Resetting method switch off (conbined with earth-leakage switch off (conbined with earth-
indicator) leakage indicator)
Configuration 1c 1a1c 1a1c 1a1c
Continuous current capacity A 5 5 5 5
Built-in contact
cosφ=0.4 cosφ=0.4 cosφ=0.4 cosφ=0.4

cosφ=1 cosφ=1 cosφ=1 cosφ=1
L/R=0.007 L/R=0.007 L/R=0.007 L/R=0.007
120VAC 5 2 120VAC 5 3 120VAC 5 2 120VAC 5 3
240VAC 5 2 240VAC 3 2 240VAC 5 2 240VAC 3 2
Contact capacity A 24VDC 5 2 415VAC 2 1 24VDC 5 2 480VAC 1 1
30VDC 4 3 Use auxiliary relay for AC415V contact. 30VDC 3 3
100VDC 0.4 0.4
200VDC 0.2 0.2
Front Clamp terminal Clamp terminal Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
Connection
Rear – Clamp terminal Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
Standard attachment (Front connection) Mounting screw
Mass kg Relay 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4
External Terminal cover (TC-ZBA) (TC-ZSA) (TC-ZSA)(Note 6) (TC-ZSA)(Note 6)
accessories Mounting hook for IEC 35mm rail (DIN rail) Fixture (DIN-ZBA) – – –
Max. consumption VA 3
Conforming standard
UL1053 UL1053
US UL standard (UR certified) – – Recognized component Recognized component
(File No.E196562) (File No.E196562)
Canada CSA standard – – LR103083(Certified No.) LR103083(Certified No.)
Declaration for conformity Declaration for conformity
European CE marking – – IEC60947-2 AnnexB IEC60947-2 AnnexB
EN60947-2 AnnexB EN60947-2 AnnexB
Note (1) Interchargeable leakage relay can be freely combined with relay and our ZCT. However, 30mA sensitivity product Remark (1) Relays with rate shown in the ( ) in the space for rate
(excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can be combined with only ZT15B, ZT30B and ZT40B. are manufactured by your order.
(2) Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and JIS together. For voltage indication in (2) CE marking is for self-statement for the purpose of
JIS, 100-200V changeover for 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover for 240-440V changeover, 460V for interrupting NF when ground-fault occurs by combining
480V are described together. When ordering, specify "UL/JIS". with our NF with CE marking (voltage tripping device).
(3) Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and CE together. For voltage indication in (3) NV-ZBA/ZSA
CE, 120-230V changeover for 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeover for 240-440V selectable are described Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
together. When ordering, specify "UL/CE". 120V 80~126V 100 • 110V • 120V
(4) When the operating time are 0.3 and 0.45 seconds, 0.8 and 1.0 seconds, and 1.6 seconds, the relay operates 240V 160~252V 200 • 220 • 240V
415V 320~484V 400 • 415 • 440V
between 0.15 and 0.45, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.
(4) NV-ZHA/ZLA
(5) Can be combined with interchangeable ZCT with primary conductor. Refer to the next page for detail.
Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
(6) It's not UL-certified.
120V 80~132V 100 • 110 • 120V
240V 160~264V 200 • 220 • 230 • 240V
440V 304~484V 380 • 400 • 415 • 440V
480V 368~528V 460 • 480V
31
Interchangeable ZCT
Type Z T15B Z T30B Z T40B Z T60B Z T80B Z T100B
Aperture diameter (mm) 15 30 40 60 80 100
Mass (kg)
Rated short time current
0.2 0.4 0.6
50 (peak value)
2.0 2.6 3.3
2
Dimensions (mm) a 48 68 85 140 160 185
b 52 52 52 90 90 90
e
c 70 90 100 150 169 190

c
d
a d 25 50 50 100 100 100
e 40 40 40 70 70 70
ZCT aperture diameter and permissible wire size

15 30 40 60 80 100
ZCT aperture diameter (mm)
Max. permissible 600V rated wire size in mm2 (current in amperes)
1ø2w Polyvinyl chloride insulated wire 14 (88) 60 (217) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992) 800 (1185)
Cross- linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 38 (190) 60 (260) 250 (655) 400 (870) 600 (1140)
1ø3w
Polyvinyl- chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 250 (556) 500 (842) 725 (1095)
3ø3w
Cross- linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 22 (135) 60 (260) 200 (560) 325 (760) 600 (1140)
3ø4w Polyvinyl- chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992)
Cross- linked polyethylene insulated cable — 14 (105) 38 (190) 100 (365) 250 (655) 400 (870)
Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors

Type Z TA600A Z TA1200A Z TA2000A
Number of poles 3
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value)
a a 227 227 360
b 256 298 250
ba
b
ba 366 444 594
c c 42 78 79
ca ca 125 176 214
ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors

Frame (A) 600 1200 2000 3200
ZBA NV-ZBA3200
ZSA NV-ZSA3200
Type Interchangeable ELR and interchangeable Z CTs w ith primary conductors
ZHA NV-ZHA3200
ZLA NV-ZLA3200
Number of poles 3
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value)
a
a 227 227 360 490
b 256 298 250 320
ba
b
ba 366 444 594 868
c c 42 78 79 111
ca ca 125 176 2 14 290

Mass (kg) 6.5 11 27 54
Control voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) Inertial nonoperating time (s)
ZBA 120 • 240✳ 100 • 200 • 500✳
High- speed type 0.1 —
120 • 240✳,
ZSA 100 • 200 • 500✳
240 • 415✳
ZBA 120 • 240✳ 100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6✳ 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
120 • 240✳ 100 • 200 • 500✳

Specification of ZSA 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6✳ 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
240 • 415✳ (200 • 500 • 1000✳)
ELRs
Time-delay type 100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0✳ – • 0.1 • 0.5
120 • 240✳
High-speed •  ZHA
240 • 440✳ 100 • 300 • 500✳
Time-delay type 300 • 500 • 1000✳
0.45 • 1.0✳ (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0✳ – • 0.1 • 0.5

120 • 240✳
ZLA 240 • 440✳ 100 • 300 • 500✳
480 0.45 • 1.0✳ (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
300 • 500 • 1000✳
✳ Selectable.
32
Circuit Protectors
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS TYPE CP

Frame (A) 30
Type CP30-BA CP-S
Photo
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5 2.5
Rated current (A) 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.75 1 2 2.5 3 5 7 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
AC (V) 250 250 –
Rated voltage (V)
UL1077 DC (V) 65 125 – 65 –
CSA C22.2 No.235 ✳11 AC 2.5kA at 250V 1.5kA at 250V –
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V – 1kA at 65V –
IEC 60934 1.5kA at 230V
EN 60934 AC 250 2.5kA at 120V
GB 17701 ✳11
1kA at 120V
Rated short-circuit (Icn) DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V – 1kA at 60V 1kA at 60V
(1kA at 60V) ✳7
capacity (kA)
1.5kA at 250V
JIS C 4610 AC 2.5kA at 230V
2.5kA at 125V
(Icn)
1kA at 125V
DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V – 1kA at 65V 1kA at 65V
(1kA at 65V) ✳7
EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 –
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2 AC 2.5/2.5kA at 230V –
(Icu/Ics) DC 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V – –
✳1 ✳8
AC-DC common use ● – –
Reverse connection ● –
AC250V 50/60Hz 1500A 0.02s
Rated short time current AC125V 50/60Hz 2500A 0.02s
–
(for switch only type) DC65V 1000A 0.02s
DC125V 1000A 0.02s
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 (T40) 25 (T25)
Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD);
Operating characteristics
Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F)✳2 Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO]
Mode of tripping Medium type (M), (MD) Medium type (M), (MD)
Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM] Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM]
Fast type (F) Fast type (F), (FD)
Method of operation S-type (IEC60934)
Trip-free behaviour Trip-free (IEC60934)
Mass (kg) 0.08 0.16 0.23 0.06 0.12 0.18
Inertial delay (ID) ● (Medium, Slow type: AC only) ● (Medium, Slow, Fast type:AC only)
Alarm switch (AL) ● (1c) ● (1c) ✳7
Auxiliary switch (AX) ● (1c) ● (1c)
Shunt trip (SHT) ● (for relay type) ✳3 ● (for parallel and relay type:AC only)
Accessories Terminal cover (TC) ● ✳6 –
Flushpanel mounting brackets (FP) ● –
Back facing wiring termnal (BT) ● ✳4, 6 –
Lock cover (LC) – ● –
Accessory terminal cover (TC) ● ✳6 –
20A or less : Screw terminal M4 Male tub terminal 6.3mm (#250)
Main body
Connection 30A : Screw termnal M5 [Screw terminal M4 (series type only)]
Alarm switch / Auxiliary switch Screw terminal M3.5 Male tub terminal 2.8mm (#110)
Srface, IEC rail mounting
Main body mounting method Panel mounting
Flush panel mounting (option)
International standard UL(cURus), CCC ✳5 UL(UR) ✳9, 10 –
 Operating characteris is 
CE Marking
EN60934 : TUV approval
EN60934 : TUV approval ✳10
 Medium type (M) only.
The rated current, 0.3A,

EN60947-2 : Self-declaration ✳5  2A, 3A and 7A are not 
 applied. 
✳ 1. The 3P products are use for AC only.
✳ 2. Contact us for operating characteristics other than those mentioned above.
✳ 3. In the pole with a shunt tripping apparatus, an over-current tripping element becomes nothing. (Switched type shunt tripping type)
✳ 4. In the case of back wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with ratings 20A or less, or 30A.
✳ 5. UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products.
✳ 6. It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV.
✳ 7. In case of DC use, only DC65V is available.
✳ 8. Specify if for DC use when ordering.
✳ 9. Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.)
✳ 10. Connection is male tub terminal only.
✳ 11. CP30-BA only.
Remark (1) The non-standard conditions products are also made by your order.
(Low temperature, Moisture-fungus treatment of the 1st kind, Moisture-fungus treatment of the 2nd kind, Corrosion resistive.)
(2) Although buzzing sound may be made if an instantaneous type becomes 80% or more of rated current when it is used by AC, there is no problem on a performance.
Therefore, when used in a quiet environment, please select after taking this point into consideration.
(3) Please use it in a circumference environment without temperature, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact.
And please do not use it in a circuit with inrush current, and a circuit with harmonics. It may become unnecessary action or trouble.
33
3. Special Purpose Breakers
Mag Only, DC-Use And DSN-Type
Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers)

NF63-CW/SW/HW AC, DC
NF125-CW/SW/HW AC, DC
Fixed NF160-SW/HW
NF250-CW/SW/HW
AC, DC
AC, DC
Rated current x10
2
NF400-CW/SW
AC, DC
NF630-CW/SW
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x4
NF125-SGW/HGW
(AC)
NF160-SGW/HGW AC, DC
NF250-SGW/HGW
Low: Rated current x5.2
(DC)
Adjustable
NF800- SEW AC
Remarks: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C, S
3
NF800- SDW DC High: 8000A Low: 3200A
and H series breakers.
NF1000-SEW High: Rated current x10
AC 2. For more detail, contact your dealer.
NF1250-SEW Low: Rated current x2
NF1600-SEW AC
NF1250-SDW High: 8000A
DC
NF1600-SDW Low: 3200A
DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches

Breaking is more difficult with direct currents because Wiring diagram for DC-usage.
the current value never reaches zero. While ordinary
DC breakers are suitable for low voltages, special
voltage DC breakers are recommended for voltages in
excess of 250VDC. Breakers for 550V are all 4-pole
models.
The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all Wiring diagram for DC use.
identical to the S series of same-designation breakers. Note: The tripping characteristics will change if the wiring differs from the one
shown here.
Type NF63-SW NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (VDC) 400 440 550 440 550 440 550 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
2/1 10/5 20/5 20/5 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/20 40/20
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Notes: 1: Time constant: 10ms or below.
• DC side
These breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonard communication failure. (Mag-Only breakers can also
system DC-side breakers. They protect the thyristor be used for this role.) Use these breakers in
from short circuiting when there is a power or combination with fast fuses for even greater protection.
Type NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Rated voltage (VDC) 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440
Interrupting capacity (kA) 15 10 15 20 15 20 20 20 20 20 20
Instantaneous trip current (min.) 3 times rated current 3 times rated current 3 times rated current 900A 1000A 1400A 2500A 3200A
• DSN-type switches
These are standard MCCBs without the automatic The appearance, size, drilling plan and available
tripping element. The tripping capacity is about six accessories are all identical to similar type standard S
times the rated current. and C series MCCBs.
Type DSN30- CS DSN63-CW DSN125-CW DSN250-CW DSN400- CW DSN630- CW DSN800- CW
Rated current (A) 30 63 125 250 400 630 800
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Rated voltage (AC/ DC) 460/ — 500/ 250 500/ 250 500/ 250 600/ 250 600/ 250 600/ 250
Max. switching current (AC/ DC) 180/ — 378/155 750/ 310 1500/ 625 2400/ 1000 3780/ 1575 4800/ 2000
Type DSN32-SW DSN50-SS DSN63-SW DSN125-SW DSN125-SGW DSN160-SGW DSN250-SW DSN250-SGW DSN400-SW DSN630-SW DSN800-SW DSN1000-SW DSN1250-SW DSN1600-SW
Rated current (A) 32 50 63 125 125 160 250 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Number of poles 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (AC/ DC) 500/250 265/125 500/250 690/250 690/300 690/300 500/250 690/300 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250
Max. switching current (AC/ DC) 192/80 300/125 378/155 750/310 750/315 960/400 1500/625 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000 6000/2500 7500/3125 9600/4000
34
400Hz-Use, Instantaneous And Generator Protection
400Hz-Use MCCBs
Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 400Hz circuit. • Specifications
When standard MCCBs are used in the high frequency The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,
circuit (eq. 400Hz), the instantaneous chracteristic will drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the
be shifted higher. “400Hz use MCCBs” are standard S and H series of same-designation breakers.
reccomended to use in 400Hz circuit.
*1
Type NF125-SW NF125-HW NF250-SW NF250-HW NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
16, 20, 32, 16, 20, 32,
125, 150 125, 150 225, 250 200~350 300~500 400~600 600~800 800~1200
Rated current (A) 40, 50, 63, 40, 50, 63, 400, 500
175, 200 175, 200 300, 350 adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
80, 100 80, 100
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated insulation voltage (V ) 690
690V 8/4 10/5 – 5/3 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 25/13 25/13
Rated breaking capacity 500V 18/9 30/15 15/8 30/8 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 65/33 65/33
(kA) 440V 25/13 50/25 25/13 50/13 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 85/43 85/43
IEC60947- 2 (Icu / Ics) 400V 30/15 50/25 30/15 50/13 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/43 85/43
230V 50/25 100/50 50/25 100/25 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 125/63 125/63
Note *1. Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix)
Low-Instantaneous MCCBs
• Low-Inst. MCCBs for Discrimination • Specifications
When a power fuse (PF) is used for high-voltage
proection, make sure that the MCCB on the secondary
side is compatible. PF short-time
PF MCCB tolerance capacity
operating
NF125-CW NF125-SW NF250-CW NF250-SW NF400- CW characteristic
Time
Type
Tr1 curve
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3
Low-inst.
MCCBs
50, 63, 80, 16, 20, 32, 40 125, 150, 175 125, 150, 175 250, 300 MCCB 1
Rated current (A)
100, 125 50, 63, 80, 100,125 200, 225, 250 200, 225, 250 350, 400
MCCB 2
Instantaneous trip 600 ● ● ● ● ●
(% of rated Current
current) 400 — — ● ● ● Fig. 4.12 Low-inst. MCCB characteristics
Remarks: 1. Ensure compatibility with motor, etc., before use to prevent accidental tripping at start up. The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,
2. Specify rated current and tripping characteristic. accessories, etc., are all identical to the standard
instantaneous trip breakers of the same designation.
3. There are no short time delay characteristics.
Generator-Protection MCCBs
These breakers are designed for generator protection.
• Specifications
Type NF125-SGW NF125-HGW NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
16-32 16-32
32-63 32-63 125~250 125~250
Rated current (A) 63-100 63-100 adjustable adjustable
75-125 75-125
adjustable adjustable
Instantaneous trip (% of rated current) 300 ✳1
Operating time at 150% of rated current (s) 18~28 ✳1
Rated insulation voltage (V) 690
AC690V 8/8 20/20 8/8 20/20
AC500V 30/30 50/50 30/30 50/50

Rated breaking
IEC60947- 2
capacity AC440V 36/36 65/65 36/36 65/65
( Icu / Ics )
(kA)
AC400V 36/36 75/75 36/36 75/75
AC230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
✳1: These MCCBs operating characteristic must be adjusted as follows.

STD ≤ 3 (Is setting)
LTD: minimum setting (TL = 12s setting)
35
MDU Breakers
Measuring Display Unit (MDU)

• Energy management becomes possible by measurement and display of load
current, line voltage, electric power, electric energy, harmonic current (3rd, 5th,
7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, 15th, 17th, 19th, and total) and power factor.
• MDU with pulse output option can output pulse of electric energy.
MDU with CC-Link option can transfer measured data to open network CC-Link.
• When a circuit breaker outputs an alarm, LED on MDU turns on.
PAL : pre-alarm
OVER : over current
• When the circuit breaker has tripped, fault cause and fault current stored in
•
EEPROM. It makes investigation of cause and restoration of power line possible.
The max. demand value of load current, line voltage, total harmonic current, 3
electric power and electric energy (hourly value), are stored in EEPROM.
And MDU with CC-Link option can store the outbreak time of these. It makes easy
finding of peak time of power consumption possible.
NF400-SEP with MDU
Application type Molded-Case Circuit Breaker
NF250-SW NF400-SEP NF630-SEP NF800-SEP
Type NF400-HEP NF630-HEP NF800-HEP
with MDU with MDU with MDU with MDU
Frame size 250 400 630 800
125, 150, 175, 200-400 300-630 400-800
Rated current In (Amp.)
200, 225, 250 adjustable adjustable adjustable
Load current (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value)
Line voltage (Present value, maximum value)
Harmonic current (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value)
Electric power (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value)
Electric energy, electric energy (hourly value),
maximum electric energy (hourly value)
Measured Power factor (Present value)

and Rated measuring current 250A 400A 630A 800A
displayed Accuracy of measuring current (Limit deviation tolerance) ±6.25A ±10A ±15.76A ±20A
value
Rated measuring voltage AC440V
Accuracy of measuring voltage (Limit deviation tolerance) ±11V
Maximum measuring current (Note1.) 500A 800A 1260A 1600A
Maximum measuring harmonic current (Note1.) 250A 400A 630A 800A
Maximum measuring voltage (Note1.) AC690V
Lead 0.0~100.0~0.0 Lag(%),
Measurement range of power factor
The value of power factor is reference value if less than 50%.
The fault cause: “AL” is
displayed. The fault current: It
displays it up to 10 times the The fault cause: Overload “L” and short-circuit “SI” are
Fault current/cause (Note1.) (Note2.) displayed.
rated current.
Overload and short-circuit (Note 3.) (“AL switch for the MDU The fault current: It displays it up to 16 times the
transmission” (option) is maximum rated current.
necessary. )
Alarm LED indication PAL, OVER
Phasing line 3φ3W, 1φ3W (3 poles breaker), 3φ4W (4 poles breaker)
Electric energy accumulated pulse output (option) (Note3.)
CC-Link transmission (option) (Note3.) (Note4.)
Control power (Allowable voltage range 85~110%) AC/DC100-240V 12VA (Note5.)
Breaker mounting
MDU installation
Panel mounting (Note7.)
Pre-alarm (PAL) (Power supply AC/DC100-240V required) PAL
Alarm contact output (option)
Trip indicator (TI) (Power supply AC/DC100-240V required) – PAL, OAL
Note1. When the input becomes more than the measurement maximum value, the current, the voltage, the harmonic current, and the fault current display the measurement maximum value. It does
the blinking display.
(However, when the fault occurs, the fault cause of and the fault current measurement value do the blinking display though it is less than measurement maximum value.)
When electric power becomes more than the measurement maximum value of or either the current or the voltage becomes more than its measurement maximum value, the electric power
does the blinking display.
Note2. Either of overload (L) or short-circuit (SI) is displayed. It doesn’t display it at the same time.
Note3. Pulse output option and CC-Link option cannot be attached at the same time.
Note4. When the breaker mounting type of MDU is installed, the version of CC-Link is “Ver.1.10”.
When the panel mounting type of MDU is installed, the version of CC-Link cable (FANC-SB) used for the terminal stand from the surface of MDU to the other side is “CC-Link Ver.1.00”.
Note5. When control power supplied to MDU, then rushed current transitionally, max. 2Apeak, 1ms (at 240VAC).
Note6. The module (terminal) is attached to the right side of the breaker.
Pre-alarm (PAL) output function can set “Self-holding” or “Auto reset”.
For function of alarm contact output (PAL, OAL), MDU and the circuit breaker must be connected with the mutuality and the control power must be supplied to MDU and alarm contact
output module.
Note7. In the case of panel mounting, the part set (the panel holder plate, the screws, the nuts and the MDU connection cable) is packed. And, the MDU connection cable is 2m (standard). (MDU
connection cable can be specified by 0.5m, 3m, and as many as 5m.)
36
MDU Breakers
Measuring Display Unit

Displayed items and functions are changed by
i Numerical
display LED
o Mode
selection
!0 Phase
selection
!1 Measured
value selection
!2 Function
selection
!3 Unit display
LED
pushing q~r switch.
(6digit) LED LED LED LED (Characters light up.) Selected item is shown by LED (below o - !2).
(Ex. Phase selection 1➞2➞3➞N➞1…)
▲/▼ switchy is active when adjustment or
reset operation is required.
(▲▼ active LEDu is turned on)
!4 Alarm
display u active LED There may be functions which cannot be
LED operated depending upon the specifications.
MODE PHASE VALUE FUNCTION
(UP) switch
The invalid function is skipped.
y
y (DOWN) switch
q Mode w Phase e Measure value r Function t ENTER

selection selection selection switch selection switch
switch switch switch
Installed on the circuit Installed on the panel

breaker
37
NF250-SW with MDU
Front-Connection
Insulating barrier
Insulating barrier
(removable)
(removable) 105 100
Mounting hole 70 35 92
Mounting hole 4 72
22 M8 bolt
68
(Hex-soket) Breaker Breaker
100
100
24
22
φ8.5
102
165
144
102
165
144
126
126
50
50
37
φ8.5
φ4.5
10
75
23 max.
3
100
100
Neutral 35 35 35
(Bus t max.=7)
pole
90 90
Trip Trip 45 Bus drilling for M4✕0.7 taps
105 MDU
105 30 direct connection or φ5
button button 61
140 MDU
MDU 3-pole 4-pole
terminal
terminal
cover Drilling plan
cover
3-pole 4-pole
1mm clearance on each

Rear-Connection Front-plate cutout side of handle.
Mounting plate (Load side of breaker mounting has given

t max. 3.2 the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
100 Stud can be
92 rotated 90° 4-pole 4-pole
4 72 Insulating Breaker 105 Breaker
4-pole Breaker
68 tube 35 3-pole 3-pole
MDU
3-pole
26
R1
R1
Connection
144
126
144
52
allowance
37
8
φ8.5
22
20
150
75
φ24
φ4.5
M4✕0.7 35
35 35
15 15 breaker φ24 32.5
30 6 mounting 70
45 71 M4✕0.7 taps 32.5
screw or φ5
MDU φ9 70
61 106 100 100
M8 bolt 105
3-pole 4-pole
Insulating
tube Drilling plan <Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF250-SW with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)

MDU panel mounting MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. MDU Terminal
<Panel mounting>
Space greater than the value
Panel
shown in the figure below 4
thickness
must be secured, and must be 3
1~3.2mm
separate 10cm or more from the 2
Operation/display distribution line. 1
75 R2 72 40
75 L2
side
L1
12
70
Panel
86.5
Control power
90
28.5
1 2 3 4
40
M4 screw Panel holder plate No transmission

MDU display For the set
part installation Pulse output 113 114
198
Terminal PE screw (M4)

M3 nut
Upper Terminal block Front panel cutout
40
MDU connector <Breaker mounting>
side
158
Terminal block
96
85
90
72
M3.5
screw
8.5
58.5 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
30 In case of front connection,
Terminal Control power
M4 screw cover keep space between MDU and
M3 nut
conductor or insulation
54
barrier too.
1 2 3 4 5 6
No transmission FG
Pulse output FG 113 114
38
MDU Breakers
NF250-SW with MDU (CC-Link)

MDU panel mounting MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. MDU Terminal Figure of the breaker mounting
is removed the terminal cover.
Space greater than the value <Panel mounting>

shown in the figure below
Operation/display must be secured, and must be
Panel 8
side 75 7
Panel thickness separate 10cm or more from the
12
70 6
1~3.2mm distribution line. 5
4
28.5
Panel holder R2 3
75 72 76 2
plate 1
M3 screw
38
86.5
90 L2
L1 Control power
40
Terminal MDU MDU display For the set 1 2 3 4
Upper M3 nut
PE screw(M4) connector part installation
side SLD DG DB DA
218
5 6 7 8
SLD DG DB DA
48
M3
Front panel cutout
85
90
96
screw
104.5
67.5
158
<Breaker mounting>
43.1 Terminal
Terminal
cover
block M3 nut
58.5
Terminal block
23 In case of front connection,
M3 screw
keep space between MDU and
55
conductor or insulation
barrier too. L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
Control power
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG SLD DG DB DA
39
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU
Front-Connection Insulating barrier 94.5
(removable)
112 28 44
Conductor
Mounting hole 56 t max.=8 8
16
51 22
110
Breaker
43
39
Trip
97
button
103
194
102
257
47
φ12.5
51
φ7
75
39
3
PE
12
Current M6 taps
Neutral 44 44
φ14 indication LED 30 44 or φ7
pole
M12 bolt OVER
25 4-pole
MDU 58 PAL 36 3-pole
5 107 φ10.5
terminal MDU 70%
168
cover 90 Conductor t max.=8 Drilling plan
131
185 Conductor drilling for
140 196 155 direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
Rear-Connection Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each

side of handle.
(Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
4-pole Eddy-current
Stud can be Breaker
Mounting plate heat-reducing slit Breaker
rotated 90° 3-pole MDU
4-pole 4-pole
8
3-pole 3-pole
Connection M6 taps
allowance or φ7
194
14
225
265
225
20
R6 R6
25 20
26
83
46
128
92
M6 breaker
63
mounting screw 44 φ35 44
10 8
138
φ13 87
87 Insulating 43.5
113 M12 bolt
tube 33
130.5 130.5 37 37
(59)
3-pole 4-pole
118 118
Drilling plan
<Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP, NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)

4
Panel must be secured, and must be 3
thickness separate 10cm or more from the 2
1~3.2mm 1
distribution line.
Operation/display L2
side 75 75 R2 72 40 L1
70 Control power
12
Panel
1 2 3 4
86.5
90
28.5
No transmission
M4 screw Pulse output 113 114
40
Panel holder plate

MDU display For the set
Terminal PE screw (M4) part installation
M3 nut
Upper Terminal block MDU connector <Breaker mounting>
40
side
Front panel cutout
B
Terminal block
85
90
96
72
Type A B
M3.5
screw NF400-SEP 244 205 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
8.5
58.5 NF400-HEP 374 205

Control power
30 Terminal cover NF630-SEP 253 221
In case of front connection,
M4 screw M3 nut NF800-SEP 263 221 keep space between MDU
and conductor or insulation
54
NF630-HEP
383 221 barrier too.
NF800-HEP 1 2 3 4 5 6
No transmission FG
Pulse output FG 113 114
40
MDU Breakers
NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU

Front-Connection
Insulating barrier 70 94.5
Conductor t max. 600AF 44 600AF 24
51 (removable)
35 600AF t8 800AF 46 800AF 26
800AF t12
Mounting hole
110
8 Breaker
87
97 Dimension of terminal
directly connected to
32
243
103
conductor
275
102
15
51
φ14
φ8
Trip φ8.5
75
8
button
Current 8
87
indication LED
600AF 44
12
OVER 70 M6 taps 70
800AF 46 22
or φ7
32
85 PAL
15
PE 50 30
MDU 40
90
70%
14 210 5 107
Neutral
MDU Conductor t max. 3-pole 4-pole
40 280 pole 131
terminal 600AF t8
φ14 800AF t10
140 cover Drilling plan
M12 bolt 155
210
Conductor drilling for
4-pole direct connection
3-pole
Rear-Connection Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each

side of handle.
(Load side of breaker mounting has given
Connection the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
Stud can be M6 taps Eddy-current
allowance
rotated 90° or φ7 heat-reducing slit
Mounting 25 Breaker 4-pole 4-pole
MDU
plate
5
3-pole 3-pole
10
15 Breaker Breaker
8
12.5
243
295
R6 R6
243
40
13
46 46
92
138
10
70
8 70
32
M6 breaker φ48 70 51
φ13 140 51
113 110 140 mounting 6
M12 bolt 210
screw 172
(86)
3-pole 4-pole 172
Drilling plan <Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP, NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (CC-Link)


Operation/display
must be secured, and must be 8
side 7
75 Panel Panel separate 10cm or more from the 6
thickness 5
12
70 distribution line. 4
1~3.2mm 3
28.5
2
Panel holder 1
plate 75 R2
72 76
M3 screw
38 L2 Control power
L1
86.5
MDU
90
Terminal M3 nut
A
Upper
PE screw(M4) connector
side 1 2 3 4
40
MDU display SLD DG DB DA

part For the set 5 6 7 8
48
M3 installation
SLD DG DB DA
85
90
96
104.5
screw
B
67.5
Front panel cutout

<Breaker mounting>
43.1
Terminal Type A B
Terminal cover NF400-SEP 263 205
block
58.5 M3 nut Terminal block
23
NF400-HEP 393 205
M3 screw NF630-SEP 272 221
NF800-SEP 282 221
55
In case of front connection,

NF630-HEP keep space between MDU
and conductor or insulation L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
402 221
NF800-HEP barrier too.
Control power
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG SLD DG DB DA
41
4. Connection Method
1. Connection Types The front connection model will be delivered unless otherwise specified. Notice, however,
that you can convert the front connection model to other types (excluding the plug-in) by
Table 4-1: Connection Types using an appropriate connection component, which is separately available.
Connection Method (Abbreviation) Front connection (F) Solderless terminal Rear connection (B) Plug-in (PM)
Appearance
✽1
2. Connection Accessories 3
Table 4-2: List of Connection Accessories
Type name Solderless terminal (SL) Rear studs (B-ST) Plug-in (PM) ✽1
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P ST-05SW2 PM-05SW2

NF32-SW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 3P ST-05SW3 PM-05SW3
–
NF63-SW/HW 4P ST-05SW4 PM-05SW4
NV100-SEP/HEP 3P ST-1SP3 PM-1SP3
NF125-CW/SW
NF125-HW
2P
SL-1SW4L
SL-1SW4G
✽3
✽4
ST-1SW2
ST-1HW2
PM-1SW2
PM-1HW2 4
NF125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-CW/SW/HW SL-1SW3L ✽3 PM-1SW3
3P ST-1SW3
NV125-RW SL-1SW3G ✽4 PM-1UW3
SL-1SW4L ✽3
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P ST-1SW4 PM-1SW4
SL-1SW4G ✽4
SL-2SW4L ✽5
NF250-CW/SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW 2P SL-2SW4G ✽6 ST-2SW2 PM-2SW2
SL-2SW3L ✽5
NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/RW/SEW/HEW SL-2SW3G ✽6
ST-2SW3
3P PM-2SW3
SL-2UW3L ✽5
NV250-RW ST-2UW3
SL-2UW3G ✽6
SL-2SW4L ✽5
NF250-SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW 4P ST-2SW4 PM-2SW4
SL-2SW4G ✽6
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW PM-2GSWIP2 ✽2

2P SL-2GSW4 ST-2GSW2
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW PM-2GUW2
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW PM-2GUW3
NF250-UGW, NF125-UGW –
NF400-CW/SW 2P – ST-4SW2 PM-4SW2
NF400-CW/SW/SEW, NV400-CW/SW/SEW 3P
– ST-4SW3 PM-4SW3
NF400-HEW/REW, NV400-HEW/REW 3P
NF400-SW/SEW, NV400-SEW 4P
– ST-4SW4 PM-4SW4
NF400-HEW, NV400-HEW 4P
NF630-CW/SW 2P – ST-6SW2 PM-6SW2
NF630-CW/SW/SEW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW 3P
– ST-6SW3 PM-6SW3
NF630-HEW/REW, NV630-HEW 3P
NF630-SW/SEW, NV630-SEW 4P
– ST-6SW4 PM-6SW4
NF630-HEW 4P
NF800-SDW 2P – ST-8SW2 PM-8SW2
NF800-CEW/SEW, NV800-SEW 3P
– ST-8SW3 PM-8SW3
NF800-HEW/REW, NV800-HEW 3P
NF800-SEW 4P
– ST-8SW4 PM-8SW4
NF800-HEW 4P
Notes: ✽1 You can use the plug-in terminal unit (PM) when the wiring of terminal units is required in advance, and the delivery of both the main body and the components at the same time,
which is normal, is not allowed. Furthermore specify the nonuse of plug-in terminal (PM-N) for the connection of circuit breaker.
✽2 If safety device is necessary ,please require.
✽3 Connected wire size: 2.5~25mm2
✽4 Connected wire size: 25~70mm2 Line Load
✽5 Connected wire size: 14~95mm2
✽6 Connected wire size: 70~125mm2
3. Connection of Line and Load

The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is (a) normal connection shown on
the right. Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection, which may lead to the decrease in
breaking performance. However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models
(except NF models with MDU). Load Line
NF-C series, NF-S series, NF-H series, NF-U series, Normal connection (a) Reserve connection (b)
MB series, C • S • H series of NV400~800A Frame Reverse connection is allowed for the standard models.
Normal and reverse connection methods

42
5. Accessories
1. Accessories
Table 5-1: Accessories
Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type of accessories
AL Alarm switch A switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker. NF-C·S·H·U,
NV-C·S·H·U
●
AX Auxiliary switch A switch that electrically indicates the ON-OFF status of the circuit breaker. and MB series
●
A device that electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote distance. NF-C·S·H·U
SHT Shunt trip Permissible working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or
70 to 125% of the DC rated voltage.
and MB series ●
A device that automatically trips the circuit breaker if the voltage is lowered. NF-C·S·H·U, (Note 1)
UVT Undervoltage trip Working voltages are 70 to 35% of the UVT rated voltage. When the voltage
recovers to 85% or higher, you can reset the device and put into operation.
NV-C·S·H·U
and MB series
●
A switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the earth leakage circuit
EAL Earth-leakage alarm switch breaker caused by a ground fault. If 250AF and less, This switch is available
only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).
NV-C·S·H·U –
This module allows you a remote testing by applying a voltage.

TBM Test button module An external sequence common to SHT can be used. (The standard
configuration requires the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).)
NV-C·S·H·U –
MG Insulation switch
The incorporation of this switch enables the measurement of insulation resistance
between the terminals of the load with the circuit breaker being turned OFF.
NV-C·S·H·U –
PAL Pre-alarm module Indicates that the load current exceeds the pre-alarm setting current. Electronic Types –
Electronic Types
OAL Overcurrent trip alarm switch Indicates that the breaker has been tripped by overcurrent or short-circuit current.
(SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW) –
Note: (1) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are excluded.
2. Switch Operation and Rating

Table 5-2: AL Switch Operation Table 5-6: AL·AX·EAL Switch Rating (In case of EAL, 400AF and more)
Circuit breaker status AL switch contact
AC DC
98/ALa (open) Switch

type Voltage Current (A) Voltage Current (A)
96/ALb (closed)
OFF or ON 95/ALc (V) Resistive Inductive (V) Resistive Inductive
load load load load
98/ALa (closed)
460 – – 250 0.2 0.2
96/ALb (open)
Trip 95/ALc
S 250 3 2 125 0.4 0.4
Table 5-3: AX Switch Operation 125 5 3 30 4 3

Circuit breaker status AX switch contact
460 5 2 250 0.3 0.3
14/AXa (open)
12/AXb (closed) V 250 10 10 125 0.6 0.6
OFF or Trip 11/AXc
125 10 10 30 10 6
14/AXa (closed)
12/AXb (open) 460 5 2.5 250 5 3
ON 11/AXc *1
X 250 10 10 125 10 6
Table 5-4: EAL Switch Operation
125 10 10 30 10 10
Circuit breaker status EAL switch contact
EALa (open) Note: *1. When DC use polarity must be considered.
250A frame or less Please contact us for applications in the field of smaller current values.
Over current, short circuit EALc
Table 5-7: EAL Switch Rating (250AF and less)
trip or on or off EALa (open)
400A frame or more EALb (closed) AC
EALc
Current A Vertical lead-wire
EALa (closed) Voltage terminal unit
250A frame or less (V) Resistive Inductive
EALc load load EALa
Ground-fault trip Indicator lamp
EALa (closed) 200 3 2 (example)
400A frame or more EALb (open) P2 Control power
supply
EALc 100 3 2 P1(EALc)
Table 5-5: MG Switch Operation A control power supply (compatible to

100 and 200V AC) is required; see the
Circuit breaker status MG switch status diagram on the right showing its wiring.
(The permissible range of voltage of the
control power supply is 80 to 242V AC,
and the power requirement is 10VA.)
OFF or Trip MG switch (open)
ON MG switch (closed)
43
3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction
Table 5-8: Combinations of Accessories
Series NF-C · S · H · U, MB NV-C · S · H · U
NF32-SW(3P)
NF63-CW/SW/HW(3P)
NF125-CW(3P), NF125-SW(3P, 4P)
NF125-HW, NF125-SGW/HGW NV32-SW
NF125-RGW/UGW NV63-CW/SW/HW
NF32-SW NV125-CW/SW/HW
Type NF30-CS NF63-CW/SW/HW NF160-SW/SGW/HW/HGW NV30-CS
MB30-CS NF250-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW NV250-SEW/HEW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NF250-RGW/UGW NV125-RW, NV250-RW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
MB100-SW, MB225-SW
Poles 2, 3 2 2, 3, 4 3 3, 4
(Note 7) (Note 7)
AL 1 2
(Note 7) (Note 7)
AX 1 2
(Note 7) (Note 1) (Note 7) (Note 1)

1 2
AL + AX
1 2
3-pole product only
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
(Note 3) (Note 4)
SHT or UVT (Note 6)
(Note 2)
AL + SHT or UVT 5
(Note 2)
AX + SHT or UVT
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Accessories AL + AX + SHT or UVT
MG
(Note 7)
AL + MG
AX + MG
(Note 5)
EAL
(Note 9)
TBM
PAL
Notes: (1) Second AX can substitute the AL on the left-pole.

(2) Models with UVT require a UVT voltage module to be installed on the lead-wire terminal unit. (No such voltage module is required for SHT.) Part of UVT accessories is not of
cassette type. (Details will be available upon request.)
(3) UVTs for left-pole installation can be produced, if specified, for frame current values of 125A (excluding SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW).
(4) SHT cannot be installed.
(5) EALs are available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). Specify a control power supply of either 100 or 200 V AC.
(6) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are not allowed to install the UVT device.
(7) The standard lead drawing is performed laterally. Load drawing is also available.
(8) Only the models with an SLT are available. EAL and PAL require a control power supply (shared 100 - 200 VAC).
For the 24 VDC TBM only, instruct us of a control voltage. (The standard shared voltage is 100 - 240 VAC/100 - 240 VDC.)
(9) Models CE marking are not allowed to install the TBM device.
Remarks: (1) Circled numbers indicate the order of installation.
(2) Accessories of EAL, and TBM can be installed independent of installations of AL, AX, and MG. (Two units among EAL, and TBM cannot be installed at the same time.) 44
5. Accessories

mounting mounting MG EAL TBL PAL TBM Lead wire direction
NF1000-SEW
NF400-CW/SW
NF1250-SEW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW
NF- C/ S/H NF1600-SEW
NF630-CW/SW NF800-SEW/HEW/REW
Type NF1250-SDW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
NF1600-SDW
NF- U NF400- UEW (3P) NF400- UEW (4P), NF800- UEW —
Poles 2, 3, 4
Switch type S V
✳3
AL
✳3
1 3 1 5 3 1 3
AX 2 4
2 4 2 6 4 5 6
✳1 ✳1 ✳2
✳2 ✳2
SHT
or
UVT
✳3 ✳3
AL + AX
✳1 ✳1 ✳2
✳2 ✳2
✳3 ✳3
Accessories AL + SHT or UVT ✳4 ✳4
✳1 ✳1 ✳2
✳2 1 3 ✳2
✳3 2 4
5
✳3
AX + SHT or UVT ✳4 ✳4
1 3 1
3
2 4 2
✳1 ✳1 ✳2
✳2 ✳2
✳3 ✳3
AL + AX + SHT or UVT ✳4 ✳4
✳5 ✳5 ✳5
PAL
(contact output)
Option for NF1000-SEW
Option for NF400- SEW/ HEW/ REW/ UEW (3P) Option for NF400-UEW (4P) NF1250-SEW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF1600-SEW
✳6 ✳6
TI
Option for NF400- SEW/ HEW/ REW/ UEW (3P) Option for NF400-UEW(4P)
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
The number within the circle shows the order of mounting.

✳1. SHT and UVT are right-pole mounting as standard. Please specify if left-pole mounting is required.
✳2. UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).
✳3. When mounting more than three left- pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special- order SLT is necessary.
✳4. When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX, or AL + AX, the UVT voltage module is separate.
✳5. SLT- equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100~200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker' s right pole.)
✳6. SLT- equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100~200V/ DC100~200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker' s right pole.)
45
NV400-CW/SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
Type NV- C/ S/H NV800-SEW/HEW
NV630-CW/SW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Poles 3, 4
Switch type S
✳2
AL
✳2
AX
✳1 ✳1
SHT or UVT
✳2 ✳2
AL + AX 5
✳1 ✳1
✳2 ✳2
✳3 ✳3
Accessories AL + SHT or UVT
✳1 ✳1
✳2 ✳2
✳3 ✳3
AX + SHT or UVT
✳1 ✳1
✳2 ✳2
✳3 ✳3
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
MG
AL + MG

✳1. UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).
✳2. When mounting more than three left- pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special- order SLT is necessary.
✳3. When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX. the UVT voltage module is separate.
46
5. Accessories
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI

NV400-CW/SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
Type NV- C/ S/H NV800-SEW/HEW
NV630-CW/SW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Poles 3, 4
Switch type S
AX + MG
AL + AX + MG
EAL
Accessories TBL
TBM
✳1 ✳1
PAL (contact output)
Option for NV400-SEW/HEW/REW

NV630-SEW/HEW Option for NV800-SEW/HEW
✳2 ✳2
TI
Option for NV400-SEW/HEW/REW

NV630-SEW/HEW Option for NV800-SEW/HEW

1. EAL, TBL, and TBM can be mounted regardless of the number of AL, AX, SHT, UVT and MG accessories. (However, two EALs, TBLs or TBMs cannot be mounted simultaneously.)
2. The PAL’ s dimensions and specifications change for the NF- C/ S and NV- C/ S series.
✳1. SLT- equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100- 200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker’ s right pole.)
✳2. SLT- equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100- 200V/ DC100- 200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker’ s right pole.)
47
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting mounting
NF50-SWU NF50-SWU NF-SFW

Type NF-C/S/H NF100-CWU NF100-CWU NF-SJW NF225-CWU NF-SKW NF-SLW
NF100-SWU NF100-SWU NF-HJW
Poles 2 3 3
Switch type S S
(Note 6)
AL
1 2 1 2 1 2
(Note 6)
AX 1 3 1 5 3
1 2 1 2 1 2
2 4 2 6 4
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
SHT
or
UVT
Accessories AL + AX 1
(Note 4)
2 1
(Note 4)
2 1
(Note 4)
2
(Note 6) (Note 6)
5
1 2 1 2 1 2
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 1) (Note 5)

AL + SHT or UVT

1 3
5
AX + SHT or UVT 2 4
1 3 1
3
2 4 2

AL + AX + SHT
or
UVT
Notes: (1) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.)
(2) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.) No cassette is attached to the UVT.
(3) If a UVT is used, the UVT voltage module is externally installed. (The SHT requires no voltage module).
(4) The 2nd AX can be installed instead of the AL on the left pole.
(5) The standard mounting of the SHT and the UVT is performed on the right pole. If mounting on the left pole is required, instruct us. (The UVTs for interlocks are mounted on the left pole.)
(6) We can manufacture the SLTs used when 3 or more accessories are installed on the left pole and the SLTs used when the AL and the AX are attached on the same pole that is
attached with the SHT or the UVT at your order.
(7) If a UVT is used and an AL, an AX or an AL + an AX are attached to the same pole that is attached with the UVT, the UVT voltage module is separately installed.
Remarks: (1) Encircled numbers show the order of mounting.
48
5. Accessories
4. Shunt Trip (SHT)

Table 5-9: Standard Coil Rating
Cut-off Input power requirement (VA) (Note 1)
Series switch Voltage (V) Operating time (ms) (Note 2)
AC DC
32(30) • 63A Frame
125A Frame AC100-240 50
(NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW are excluded) 380-550 120 15 or less
(Compatible to 50 and 60Hz. )
160 • 250A Frame DC100-125
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW 60
400 • 630 • 800 Frame

NF-C • S • H • U NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW 100V : 20
MB NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW Equipped AC100~450/DC100~200 200V : 50 100V : 10
5~15
NV-C • S • H • U NF800-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (50 also 60Hz) 330V : 120 200V : 35
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 450V : 170
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV800-SEW/HEW
AC100-120
1000 • 1250 • 1600 Frame 200-240
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW 380-450 200 70 7~15
NF1600-SEW/SDW (50 also 60Hz)
DC100
Notes: (1) Secure a sufficient input power so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage).
(2) The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open.
Table 5-10: Coil Ratings (List of manufacturable special voltages)

AC/DC
AC ( V ) DC ( V )
(V)
MCCB type
24 24~48 48 380 12 24 24~36 36 36~48 48 110 125 220 24
~550 ~250 ~48
NF-C • S • H • U
MB – ● – – ● – ● – ● – – – ● –
32(30) • 63A Frame 125A Frame 160 • 250A Frame
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW – – – ● ● – – – – – – – – ●
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV800-SEW/HEW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
● – ● – ● ● – ● – ● ● ● – –
NF1600-SEW/SDW
5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT)

Table 5-11: Coil Rating
● UVT Voltage Module
Voltage (V) Input Operating
Series (Note 1) power time (ms) The UVT voltage module is
Standard voltage Special voltage (note 5) (VA) (Note 2) (Note 3)
normally installed on the
AC100-110/120-130 selectable AC24/48 selectable vertical lead-wire terminal
200-220/230-250 selectable 500-550/600 selectable
250AF and less 380-415/440-480 selectable DC24/48 selectable
5 30 or less unit (SLT). (A separate-
(Note4) 110/125 selectable
DC100/110 selectable mount type can be produced
AC110-120 upon request.)
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW 220-240
AC100-110 380-415
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
200-220 440-480
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
400-440 500-550 5 5~30
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
(Note4) (Note4)
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW DC24
DC100
NV800-SEW/HEW 48 UVT voltage module
D3/P3
110 Circuit
breaker D2/P2 D1/P1
AC100-120 AC24 DC24
NF1000-SEW 200-240 48 48
NF1250-SEW/SDW 380-450 440-480 120-125 5 5~35 J1/UC1
NF1600-SEW/SDW (Note4) 500-550
DC100-110 (Note4)
J2/UC2
Notes: (1) A desired voltage can be selected by changing the terminal wiring. J1/UC1
(2) The operating time denotes the time from when no voltage is applied to UVT until when the main contact of the breaker
J2/UC2
starts to open.
(3) Time-delayed types can be produced. Details will be available upon request.
(4) Compatible to 50 and 60Hz UVT Voltage Module Wiring Diagram
(5) Rated voltage differs according to make and country of manufacture.Please consult your dealer. (Lead-Wire Connection)
49
6. Test Button Module (TBM)
● The effect of pressing the test button on the breaker main body is
produced while the input control voltage is applied. (Apply the voltage
for more than two seconds for the breaker main body of time-delayed
NV models.)
● The model with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT) is standard.
Table 5-12 18
Series NV-C • S • H • U
Compatible to
Input rated
AC100-240/ TBM2
control
DC100-240 TBM1
voltage (V)
(DC24) (Note 1)
92 (Terminal
cover)
10.5
Input control
1VA or less
power (VA)
Note: (1) The specifications of 100-240V (10.5)

AC/100-240V DC are standard
unless otherwise specified. The
specifications of 24 V DC are
7
available if requested.
12.5
7. Lead-wire Specifications
Table 5-13
Type Size Length Marking Ring-mark example
(Note 1) A ring-mark marked

Heat- 98/ALa , 96/ALb , 95/ALc
by the terminal symbol
resistant 0.5mm2 450mm
is attached to each C1/S1 , C2/S2
wire
lead-wire.
Note: (1) The length is 400 mm for the model of four-pole, right-pole installation.
● Lead wires are normally extended laterally.

5
● Grooves are provided standardly on the side face of the breaker,
allowing the extension of the lead wires along them. (Note 1)
Note: (1) The models of NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, 400Aframe and more are excluded.
8. Internal Terminal Type (INT)

● This unit is an internal accessory that is provided with terminal screws for lead-wire connection.
Remark: (1) Available for the models of NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW,

NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW.
50
5. Accessories
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT)

● The circuit beaker can be mounted, being closely fitted to the unit.
● Terminal screws are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and screws can be tightened further after wiring.
● A terminal cover is provided standardly.
● This unit supports the models of front connection, rear connection, and plug-in type (excluding PLT).
■NFB Table 5-14: Summary of Dimensions

Applicable models A B C D
NF30-CS, MB30-CS 4 4.5 44.5 4.5
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
7 17.5 54 17.5
Terminal cover 18 MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
(Skeleton) NF50-SWU 7 27.5 54 27.5
NF125-CW/SW/HW 7 19 54 19
D
B
10.5
NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU 7 29 54 29
NF125-HGW, NF225-HGW 25 25 54 25
10.5
NF-SFW,NF-SJW, NF-HJW 25 35 54 35
86.5
25
NF250-CW/SW/HW, NF225-CWU, NF160-SW/HW 7 37 54 37

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF-SKW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 79.5 54 79.5
41
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF-SLW 88.5 54 88.5
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW, NF1600-SEW/SDW 62.5 173 52 173
NF400-UEW(3P) 119.5 54 119.5
138
7 NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW 135.5 54 135.5
A C
12.5 Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m
M3.5 terminal screw
38
26
14
8
13.5
■NV Table 5-15: Summary of Dimensions

Applicable models A B C D E F G
NV30-CS 4 4.5 44.5 44.5 4 4.5 86.5
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 7 17.5 54 52 7 21.5 92
Terminal cover 18 NV125-CW/SW/HW 7 19 54 54 7 19 86.5
(Skeleton) NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, NV225-CWU 7 37 54 52 2.5 37 92
NV125-RW 7 80 54 54 7 80 86.5
F
B
10.5
NV250-RW 7 112 54 52 2.5 112 92

10.5
NV400-CW/SW/HW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 41 79.5 54 52 26.5 79.5 92

NV800-SEW/HEW 41 88.5 54 52 26.5 88.5 92
86.5
25
Remarks: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m

(2) Lead-wire terminal block for TBL is attached to right-side.
7
A C
12.5
M3.5 terminal screw

D
38
26
14
8
E
13.5
■14 Terminals SLT Table 5-16

Applicable models
A B
SLT when three and more than NFB NV
three pieces of internal accessories NF400-CW/SW/SEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW
NF400-HEW/REW, NF-SKW
are mounted on left-side. NF630-CW/SW/SEW
NV400-HEW/REW 20 60
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF630-HEW/REW
NF400-UEW(3P) – 117 100
25 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW
Terminal cover NV800-SEW/HEW 20 69
(Skeleton)
NF800-HEW/REW, NF-SLW
B
– 35 154
NF1600-SEW/SDW
9
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW – 117 116

11
11
Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m

115
11
41
M3.5 terminal screw 17
A 75
51
10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL)
This module functions to give alarm output when 1600AF are provided with this module as an
load current exceeds a preset current level and option. (Some modules are with this module as
serves for securing continuous power supply and standard equipment.)
also for preventive maintenance. The electronic
breakers with mount digital ETR of 125 to
Table 5-17
Pre- alarm LED Solid state relay (SSR) output- Pre- alarm module- Contact output (1a)
Type
(Auto reset) Contacties output (Auto reset) Switching capacity (Self- holding) Switching capacity Reset system
NF125-SGW/HGW
24VDC 100- 200VAC
NF160-SGW/HGW Option
20mA
NF250-SGW/HGW
NV250-SEW/HEW —
NF400- SE W NF400- HE W NF400- RE W 100VAC or Press the reset switch or
NF400- UE W NF630- SE W NF630- HE W Standard equipment Option
200VAC 2A turn off control power.
NF630- RE W NF800- CE W NF800- SE W
NF800- HE W NF800- RE W NF800- UE W 24VDC 100- 200VAC
Option
NV400- SE W NV400- HE W NV400- RE W 20mA
NV630- SE W NV630- HE W NV800- SE W
NV800- HE W
NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
Pre-alarm LED The LED starts blinking on the circuit breaker when load current exceeds the preset current, then changes to continuous glowing
when pre-alarm output is given.
Solid-state relay output Open the upper cover of the circuit breaker, connect the connector of the lead wire packed together and use it as the lead wire
outlet. In this case, only the lead wire outlet of the internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (For flush plate type,
the outlet is manufactured in advanced as a PAL mount.)
Pre-alarm module SLT is attached as standard and is used as the control power source of 100VAC or 200VAC. In this case, no other internal
accessories can be attached to the right pole. (Auto resetting is also applicable.)
•Pre-alarm characteristics
5
10h
5h 5h
Pre-alarm pick-up current
2h 2h
Pre-alarm pick-up current
1h 1h
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min LTD operating time TL
6min LTD operating time TL 6min 12-60-100-150s ± 20%
4min 60-80-100s ± 20% 4min (at 200%)
Operating time
Operating time
(at 200%)
2min 2min
1min 1min
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s Pre-alarm
Pre-alarm
5s pickup current Ip
5s pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75 In x(0.7-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10% 2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10%
2s
-0.95-1.0) -0.95-1.0)
1s Pre-alarm 1s Pre-alarm
operatiing time Tp 0.5s operatiing time Tp
0.5s
Tp= TL ± 20%
Tp= TL ± 20% 2
0.2s 2 0.2s (at 200%)
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500
Current Current
Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating
(NF/NV125,250AF) NF/NV400,630,800AF
NF1000,1250,1600AF
PAL OUT LED

RISET
Reset switch
Indicator lamp (Example)

PALa
P2 (100VAC or 200VAC)
P1 Control power pre-alarm output
(PALc)
In the case of flush plate type. this is mounted on back

side of the circuit breaker.
52
5. Accessories
11. Trip Indicator (TI)

When the breaker is tripped, this accessory installed on the right side will 25
control power supply
display the cause of the trip--either long delay (LTD) , short or instantaneous
(STD/INST), earth-leakage (EAL) (with earth-leakage breakers only)--on its P1
Control voltage
P2
LED and output an alarm signal. In this case, both LTD and STD/INST are
treated as overcurrent trips (OAL) and output signals. Pre-alarm is also Long-time delay(LTD) alarm LED
output. Again, with this module, it is impossible to connect other internal Pre-alarm(PAL)LED
Earth-leakage alarm (EAL)LED
accessories to the breaker’s right side.) Short-time(STD),
98
instantaneous(INST) alarm LED
Table 5-18 Reset switch

PALa
Pre-alarm output
PALc
Type LED contents
OALa Overcurrent
OALc alarm output
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW EALa Earth -leakage
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW Long- time delay, Short- time delay, Instantaneous, Pre- alarm EALc alarm output
NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-SEW/HEW Long- time delay, Short- time delay, Instantaneous,
NV800-SEW/HEW Earth- leakage, Pre- alarm
✳ Requires 100- 200VAC control voltage.
12. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR)

● In a 3-phase 4-wire circuits, the voltage rise of the circuit by phase failure of a neutral line is detected, and a
contact output is taken out.
Table 5-19
Phase/ wire type 3 ø 4W
Rated voltage VAC 415
Usable supply voltage VAC 304~484
Usable voltage (line voltage) VAC 380 400 415 440
Total operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (135% of total phase voltage) VAC 296 312 323 343
Tripping
Total nonoperating overvoltage (phase voltage) (120% of total phase voltage) VAC 263 277 288 305
characteristics
Total overvoltage operating time (s) 1
Overvoltage nonoperating time (s) More than 0.1
Trip indication method Button
Reset method Reset button (open- phase display use)
1c
AC DC
c os ø L/ R
Voltage Voltage
External output contacts 1.0 0.4 0 0.007
100, 120V 7A 7A 30V 7A 6A
200, 240V 7A 7A 125V 0.6A 0.6A
415V 5A 2A 250V 0.3A 0.3A
Remark: Using with a shunt- trip device (SHT) equipped breaker will improve tripping and phase protection.
57 M3.5 x 0.6 screw 39

37.5 self-tap terminal 9.5
63
Drilling plan
6
ø5mm or M4 x 0.7mm screw

11.5
R pole S Pole T Pole

7.5
Test button
52
Operation display
68
20
60
83
109
(reset button)
92.5
Current switch
74
52 52
11.5
N pole NRaNRbNRc min.12

10.5
Item output terminal

4.8 x 6.8 mounting hole
mounting screw M4 x 0.7 mm
53
5. Accessories
1. V-type Operating Handle

● Appearance (Color N1.5) ● Outside Dimension Diagram Center of Hinge and
Circuit Breaker
A Front plate
Front base
Handle Front plate
H
ON
H
ED
PP
TR
I
90
B
F OF
SET
RE
Left Right
Hinge Hinge
Plate
thickness
16 Circuit
1.2–3.2 C D
90 breaker
54 Minimum E
Maximum F X X
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker main ● Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram
enables the isolation function effective. H X
● The safety standards of EN Standards Circuit breaker Center of the Center of the 0 or more (5H+100) or more
operating handle circuit breaker
(EN60204-1) are satisfied. Center of the
circuit breaker The above illustration shows a view
Center of the circuit
● Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP65 is operating handle
C
L
breaker operating handle
C
L C
L of the hinges and the circuit breaker
satisfied standardly. when viewed from the direction of
● OFF-position lock only is available for up to three the load.
(Note 1)
commercial padlocks (35mm, 40mm). ● FrontPlate Drilling
● A door-lock mechanism allows the door to be C C Dimension Diagram
H
H
L L
opened at OFF-position only. Center of the circuit breaker
(Note 1) operating handle
CL ø9
Circuit
J
Either M4×0.7 Either M4×0.7 breaker
G 4
ø5
54
screw or ø5 G G screw or ø5 CL
3-pole 4-pole
Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of both V2GSW and V2GSWF. 54
Table 5-20: Summary of Dimensions
Number Dimensions (mm)
Type name Applicable models
of poles A B C D E F G H J
3P 75 –
V05SW NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW 154 300
4P 100 12.5
NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW 130 44 61 25 111
MB50-CW/SW 3P 75 –
V05SWF (Note 2) 125 –
4P 100 12.5
3P 90 –
V1SW 154 518
V1SWF (Note 2)
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW
MB100-SW
4P
3P
4P
2P, 3P
120
90
120
105
130 44 61
125 –
30 111
15
–
15
–
5
V2SW 154 518
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW 4P 140 17.5
165 46 61 35 126
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 2P, 3P 105 –
V2SWF (Note 2) 125 –
4P 140 17.5
2P, 3P 105 –
V2GSW 172 536
4P 140 17.5
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW 165 46 79 35 126
2P, 3P 105 –
V2GSWF (Note 2) 143 –
4P 140 17.5
Notes: (1) This hole is not required for two and three poles.
(2) The last letter of “F” of the type designations of V-type operating handles denotes a fixed type.
Remark: (1) You may contact us for details of the V-type operating handle for the U series.
✽ Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
Outview Drilling plan

● Can be locked in OFF position only.
● The door is locked when ON and can only be
opened in OFF position.
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with
Center of Front panel
IEC60529): IP65. breaker's handle
Center of N N
breaker's handle Breaker
External dimensions 4- 10
C Front panel Hinge Hinge
(left side) (right side)
Breaker 63 Breaker
104
Handle
M6 screw X X
or 7
N X
104
A
B
O or more P or more
The above illustration shows a view

of the hinges and the circuit breaker
M when viewed from the direction of
the load.
Panel
thickness
(a) (b) (c)
E 1.2~3.2
G H
D F Minimum J
Maximum K
Table 5-21
Breakers type Fig. Dimensions (mm)
Type Drilling
MCCB ELCB Outview A B C D E F G H J K L M P
plan
NF400- CW, NF400- SW, NF400- SE W
NF400- HE W —
V4SW
NF630- CW, NF630- SW, NF630- SE W
NF630- HE W
257 140 140 140 25 62 76 97 217 539 194 44 8N+150
NV400- CW, NV400- SW
NV400- SE W, NV400- HE W
V4SWNV —
NV630-CW, NV630-SW
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
NF800- CE W, NF800- SDW, NF800- SE W 275 140 210 140 25 62 76 97 217 539 243 70 8N+150
V8SW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
NF800- HE W a b, c
NF400- CW, NF400- SW, NF400- SE W
NF400- HE W —
V4SWF
NF630- CW, NF630- SW, NF630- SE W
NF630- HE W
257 140 140 140 25 62 76 97 191 – 194 44 8N+150
NV400- CW, NV400- SW
NV400- SE W, NV400- HE W
V4SWFNV —
NV630-CW, NV630-SW
NF800- CE W, NF800- SDW, NF800- SE W
V8SWF NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW 275 140 210 140 25 62 76 97 191 – 243 70 8N+150
NF800- HE W 54
5. Accessories
2. F-type Operating Handle

● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● Outside Dimension Diagram Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
Left hinge Right hinge
PP
ED
ON Center of H X1 H X2
the circuit
I
TR
breaker Less than 170
104
and the 0 (5H+100) 10 or more
FF
ET O
ES
or more or more
E
S
NR
R ELEA
operating
OPE
10 (5H+120)
handle
or more or more
Plate
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker 104 thickness 1.2–3.2
enables the isolation function effective. 51 A±2
Operating handle
● The standard model is equipped with a safety Front plate
device that prevents the circuit breaker from
● Drilling Dimension Diagram
being turned on if the door is open. (If not
H
desired, please specify so.) Center of the circuit
Circuit breaker
breaker operating handle 4-ø12
● The handle can be locked at either ON or CL
CL Left hinge
circuit
Right hinge
OFF position. (Three padlocks (35mm, (a) (b)
breaker
Circuit
40mm) can be installed. OFF-position lock
0
ø9
breaker
78
only specifications are also acceptable.) CL X1 X2

CL
● Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP3X
C
The above illustration shows a view of
(IP5X with dustproof packing) 78 the hinges and the circuit breaker when
(b) (a)
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit viewed from the direction of the load.
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected D
B
(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
Number Dimensions (mm) Mounting
Type name Applicable models of poles A *1 B C D screws
*2 F05SW2P *3 F05SWR2P NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P –
(a) Circuit
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW 3P, 4P 111 breaker
*2 F05SW *3 F05SWR 25
NV63-CW/SW 3P 105 Either mounting screws
*2 F1SW2P *3 F1SWR2P NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P – M4×0.7 (2 pcs)
111 screw or ø5 (b) Handle
*2 F1SW *3 F1SWR NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW 3P, 4P 30
*2 F2SW *3 F2SWR mounting screws
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 2P, 3P, 4P 107 35 126
(2 pcs)
*2 F2GSW *3 F2GSWR NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW 3P, 4P 125 35 126
*1. Dimensions of both front connection and rear connection are shown. The plug-in type has a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker.
*2. The standard type is epuipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows door to be opened only when OFF operation is carried out.
*3. In case of reset opened type use.
Remarks: (1) The test button becomes difficult to press when an operating handle is installed on an NV model. Then, use models with either TBM instead.
(2) Dustproof packings are separately available.
(3) You may consult us for details of the F-type operating handle for the U series.
● Appearance (Color N1.5) ● External dimensions Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
Flusf plate Front panel
Left hinge Right hinge
D ON
H X1 H X2
RIEP
TP
0 or more (8H +150) or more 0 or more (4H + 120) or more

150
OFF
E
ST
RE
150 Plate thickness 1.2-3.2 F-type operating handle

F4SW ~ F8UW F10SW ~ F120UR4P B A±2
Release screw Front panel
● Includes
(a)
as standard a safety device which
● Drilling plan Breaker
H
prevents breaker closing as long as the cover is

H
Center of breaker (X) (Y) Left hinge Breaker Right hinge

open. (Specify if this safety feature is not required.) 4- 15
● Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in

ON-lock position--but only in cases when a
8
F
X1 X2
11
D
112
single padlock (35mm, 40mm) is used. The figure above shows the relationship
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with (Y) (X)
between the hinge and breaker viewed
IEC60529): IP3X (IP5X with dustproof 112 C
E
from the load side of the breaker.
(b) (c)
packing).
Table 5-23
Fig Dimensions (mm)
Type Breaker type Number of poles Mounting
External Drilling *5 crews
dimensions plan A B C D E F
*6 F4SW *7 F4SWR NF400- CW/SW/ SEW/ HE W/ RE W, NF630- CW/ SW/ SEW/ HEW/ REW 2P, 3P, 4P
183 44 194 —
*6 F4SWNV *7 F4SWRNV NV400- CW/SW/ SEW/ HE W/ RE W, NV630- CW/ SW/ SEW/ HE W 3P, 4P
*6 F4UW *7 F4UWR NF400- UE W 3P 280 44 234 M6 screw 20 (X), (Y)
53 or ø7 Breaker
*6 F8SW *7 F8SWR NF800- CEW/ SDW/SEW/ HEW/ RE W 2P, 3P, 4P
a b c 183 70 243 — mounting
*6 F8SWNV *7 F8SWRNV NV800- SEW/ HEW 3P, 4P screws
*6 F8UW *7 F8UWR NF400- UEW (4P), NF800- UEW 3P, 4P 280 70 290 23.5 (4 pcs)
*7 F10SW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW 2P, 3P M8 screw
221 50 70 375 —
*7 F10SW4P NF1600-SEW/SDW 4P or ø10
*1. Handles with NV in the product name include a test button. *5. The figures show the dimensions of the front connection. Some connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference
*2. Dustproof packing is also available as an option. surface for mounting purposes.
*3. Other optional handles can also be mounted. *6. The standard type is equipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows the door to be opened only when OFF operation is
*4. F4SW~F8UW are for isolation purposes. carried out.
(Speify OFF lock only.) *7. In case of reset opened type use.
55
Specification explanation for F-type operating handles
Specification Detailed explanation Kind
The position where it can lock ON and OFF-position lock OFF-position lock only
with the padlock.
Handle lock position
Can not open, when it use
padlock. ON ON
ED ED
PP PP
I
TR
TR
When OFF-lock, please turn
OFF
OFF
ON
ED
PP handle in RESET direction.
T
I
T
SE
TR
SE
RE
RE
2
OFF T
SE
RE
The door can be opened with the RESET-position open OFF-position open
operating handle RESET-position OFF-position RESET-position OFF-position
or OFF-position. Lock lever
When the operating handle was
ON ON ON
locked, the panel (door) can not PP
ED
PP
ED
PP
ED
I
I
TR
TR
TR
be opened.
Door opening system
OFF
OFF
OFF
ET
ET
T
SE
RES
RES
RE
Lock plate
Lock lever locked Lock lever unlocked Lock lever unlocked

by lock plate by lock plate by lock plate
Mounting direction Reconstruction to vertically from Vertically type Horizontally type Horizontally type
horizontally can not be (ON side of breaker is upper) (ON side of breaker is left) (ON side of breaker is right)
The top of label is ON side of performed.
breaker
ON side
ON ON ON
5
ED ED ED
PP PP PP
I
I
TR
TR
TR
OFF
OFF
OFF
T
SE
SE
T
SE
RE
RE
RE
Label
For emergency stop use.

Red color
(In accordance with EN60204-1)
ON
ED
PP
For emergency
I
TR
OFF
*You may consult us for details

T
SE
RE
of emergency
Yellow color
56
5. Accessories
3. S-type Operating Handle

● Appearance (Color N1.5) ● Outside Dimension Diagram ● Front Plate Drilling Dimension Diagram
Operating plate 4-ø4.5 Center of the circuit
Front plate Operating plate breaker
ø62
Face plate
70
(Note 3)
41.5±4
Max. 95
47 Deviation
ON 70 of 4mm
IP
or less
R
Clasp ø12
OFF T
(Note 1)
114
Front plate deviation of 4mm or less
Center of the circuit breaker
Max. 115
100 or more (210 or more
● The handle can be locked at either ON or operating handle
when the hinge is on the left)
(Note 3)
OFF position. (Three padlocks (35mm,
80
17 43.5±4 Front plate thickness 1.2–3.2
40mm) can be installed. Off-position lock only Clasp
(Note 1)
specifications are also acceptable.) Hinge
(Note 2) C±2
(Note 2)
● Digrees of protection (IEC60529) IP5X 45
B±2
A±2
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit 34 40 110 Clasp
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected (option)
(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
Reference plane for mounting
Table 5-24: Summary of Dimensions the circuit breaker
Dimensions (mm)
Type name Applicable models
A (Note 4) B (Note 4) C (Note 4)
S05SW NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
87 102 104.5
S1SW NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW (Note 5)
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW
S2SW 95 110 112.5
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW, NV250-RW (Note 5)
S2GSW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW 113 128 130.5
Notes: (1) The clasps are not supplied standardly, and should be prepared by users Details on dimensions and others will be available upon request. Remark: (1) Reset open-type
(2) When the optional clasp is used. (2) These are not suitable for isolation.
(3) The tolerance from the center of ø62 is shown.
(4) The dimensions of the front-face type are shown. Some of the back-face and plug-in types have a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker.
(5) The front plate drilling dimensions for the U series differ from those shown above. Please consult us for their details.
● Appearance (Color N1.5) ● External dimensions ● Drilling plan 4- 5.5
Centre of
Front panel Operating plate 62 breaker
D
max. 150
84
Decorative plate
35 ± 5
45
ON
IP
*3
84
TR *1 12
114
Retainer
OFF
*5
Deviation: 2 mm or less
max. 145
130(S4CP·S4SP)
Center of breaker's Front panel

handle Deviation: 5mm or less
110 or more (250 or more if hinge
180(S100)
is mounted on the left)

● Indicatesthe tripping of the breaker even in *3
Operating 25 102 ± 5 Front panel applicable thickness : 1.6 to 3.2
ON-lock position--but only in cases when a plate *1
55 Retainer
single padlock Hinge
47 59
(35mm or 40mm) is used. 110
B±2
A±2
*2
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with (a) Retainer (b)
(option) Reference plane
IEC60529): IP5X. for mounting the breaker
Table 5-25
Fig Dimensions (mm)
Type Breaker type External Drilling plan A✳4 B✳4 C✳4 D
dimensions
S4CW *5 NF400-CW, NV400-CW a b 140 156 — 0
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 162 178 — 0
S4SW *5 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV800-SEW/HEW a b
NF400-UEW (3P) 259 275 — 20
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW 259 275 — 23.5
S10SW a b 199 215 — 0
NF1600-SEW/SDW
Notes: *1. Retainers are not included. They must be provided by the customer. Remark: (1) Reset open-type
*2. When using optional retainer.
*3. Shows the tolerance for the distance from the center of a 62mm dia. hole.
*4. The figures show the front-connection dimensions. Some rear-connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for mounting purposes.
*5. S4CW and S4SW are for isolation purposes. (Specify OFF lock only.) The tolerance is less than 5mm. It does not conform to isolation purposes, however, if the deviation is more than 2mm.
●Surface plate interlocking fastening (separately available)
Operation Breaker type Dimensions (mm)
handle series Type Drilling diagram and referential diagram
MCCB ELCB A B
NF32-SW NV32-SW
NF63-CW/SW/HW NV63-CW/SW/HW Fastening ON
TG-S05SW MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW OFF
NF125-CW/SW/HW NV125-CW/SW/HW
MB100-SW
TG-S1UW NF125-RGW/UGW NV125-RW
NF160-SW/HW
TG-S2SW NF250-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW – –
NF250-SEW/HEW,MB225-SW NV250-SEW/HEW
Fastening ON
TG-S2UW NF250-RGW/UGW NV250-RW OF

F
NF125-SGW/HGW
S-type NF160-SGW/HGW
TG-S2GSW –
NF250-SGW/HGW Center of the
NF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW handle of breaker Breaker
TG-S4CW NF400-CW NV400-CW
Center of
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW the breaker
TG-S4SW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 67 119
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW
16 A
NF400-UEW (3P) – 67 119

TG-S4UW –
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW 87 119 M5 screw
TG-S10 NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW – for attaching
NF1600-SEW/SDW 67 119 the fastening
B Drilling diagram
Remark: The clamp for surface plate interlock fastener is common to 2P, 3P and 4P.
57
4. R-type Operating Handle
● Appearance (Color N1.5) ● Outside Dimension Diagram
A
Handle
88
B
16 C
D
88 E
● Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram

● This handle in conjunction with the breaker main Circuit breaker Center of the Center of the Center of the circuit
enables the isolation function effective. Center of the operating handle circuit breaker breaker operating handle
● OFF-position lock only is available for up to three circuit breaker
CL Center of the circuit Center of the CL
operating handle CL CL
breaker operating handle circuit breaker
commercial padlocks (ø8).
● Equipped with cylinder key (option) prevent
(Note 1)
deliberate operation.
CL CL CL
G
H
CL
(Note 1)
J
F Either M4×0.7 Either M4×0.7 F Either M4×0.7
screw or ø5 F F screw or ø5 screw or ø5
Center of the
(a) 2, 3-pole (b) 4-pole operating handle (c)
Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of R2GSW.
Number Fig Dimensions (mm)
Type name Applicable models Drilling
of poles
plan A B C D E F G H J
R1SW
NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HW
NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125-HW
3P
4P
a
b 120
90
130 61 105 142 30 111 —
—
15
5
R1UW NV125-RW 3P c 90 191 61 105 142 30 172 30.5 —
NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250-CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW 2P, 3P a 105 —

R2SW NV250-CW, NV250-SW, NF250-HW, NV250-SEW 165 61 107 144 35 126 —
NV250-HEW 4P b 140 17.5
R2UW NV250-RW 3P c 105 240 61 107 144 35 201 37.5 —
2P, 3P a 105 —
NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW, 165 79 125 162 35 126 —
R2GSW
NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW 4P b 140 17.5
R2GUW NF125-RGW, NF125-UGW, NF250-RGW, NF250-UGW 3P c 105 240 79 125 162 35 201 37.5 —
✽ Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
● Can be locked in OFF position only.

Outview External dimensions Drilling plan
Breaker
B
A
M6 screw
or 7
L
E G
D F H (b)
(a) C J
Table 5-27
Breaker type Fig Dimensions (mm)
Type Drilling
MCCB ELCB Outview A B C D E F G H J K L M
plan
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW,
R4SW NF400-HEW —
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW,
NF630-HEW
257 128 140 140 25 43 97 174 218 194 44 —
NV400-CW, NV400-SW,
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW a b
R4SWNV —
NV630-CW, NV630-SW,
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW, NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW 275 128 2 10 140 25 43 97 174 218 243 70 —
R8SW
NF800-HEW
58
5. Accessories
Ordering information
V 1 SW E F NV F 1 SW A R Y 2P NV
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
1) V : Operating handle type V······· Variable-depth handle 1) F : Operating handle type
R······· Rotary handle 2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW,
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW,
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW 2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW,
MB225-SW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW 2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW,
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW, DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW,
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW, NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW 4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN400-CW/SW,
DSN400-CW/SW, NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN630-CW/SW, DSN630-CW/SW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, 8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV800-SEW/HEW, DSN800-CW/SW NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-UEW(4P),
3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS C, S and H series NF800-UEW, DSN800-CW/SW
UW indicate WSS U series 3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
4) E : For emergency Blank······ For general UW indicate WSS U series
E············ For emergency 4) A : Handle lock position Blank······ ON/OFF position lock
5) F : Adjustment type of Blank······ Variable type A············ OFF position lock only
depth (For only V-handle) F············ Fix type 5) R : Door open position Blank······ OFF position open
6) NV : Type of breaker NV·········· NV type for 400A frame R············ RESET position open
Blank······ The other 6) Y : Mounting direction Blank······ Vertically type
(ON side of breaker is upper)
Y············ Horizontally type
S 1 SW A (ON side of breaker is left)
Z············ Horizontally type
1) 2) 3) 4) (ON side of breaker is right)
1) S : Operating handle type 7) 2P : Number of poles Blank······ 3 pole and 4 pole
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, 2P···········2 pole
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, 8) NV : Type of breaker NV·········· NV type for 400 to 800 A frame
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, Blank······ The other
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW,
F 10 SW 4P
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW 1) 2) 3) 4)
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
1) F : Operating handle type
MB225-SW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, 2) 10 : Frame size of breaker 10··········· NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW,
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW NF1600-SEW/SDW
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW, 3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS
NF160-SGW/HGW, 4) 4P : Number of poles Blank······ 2 pole and 3 pole
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW, 4P·········· 4 pole
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN400-CW/SW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, R 1 SW NV
NF400-UEW 1) 2) 3) 4)
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN630-CW/SW, DSN800-CW/SW, 1) R : Operating handle type
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, 2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV125-CW/SW/HW/RW
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-UEW(4P) 2······· NF160-SW/HW,NF250-CW/SW/HW,
NF630-UEW, NF800-UEW NV250-CW/SW/SEW/HW/HEW/RW
3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS C, S and H series 2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
CW indicate WSS 400A frame C series NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-/SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
4) A : Handle lock position Blank······ ON/OFF position lock 4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
A············ OFF position lock only NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
S 10 SW 8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW,
1) 2) 3) NV800-SEW/HEW
1) S : Operating handle type 3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
2) 10 : Frame size of breaker 10···········NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD, UW indicate WSS U series
NF1600-SS/SSD, NF1250-UR 4) NV : Type of breaker NV·········· NV type for 400 to 630 A frame
3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS Blank······The other
59
5. Terminal Cover
Table 5-28
Large terminal cover Small terminal cover Transparent terminal Rear terminal cover Plug-in terminal cover
(TC-L) (TC-S) cover (TTC) (BTC) (PTC)
Breaker type A A A A A
B
C
B
B
C
B
C
B
C
C
TCL-03CS2W TCS-03CS2W TTC-03CS2 BTC-03CS2W —

NF30-CS, MB30-CS 2P (43.5×30.5×25) (43.5×30.5×5) (43.5×30.5×25) (43.5×30.5×6.5)
3P TCL-03CS3W TCS-03CS3W TTC-03CS3 BTC-03CS3W —

NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS (67×30.5×6.5)
(67×30.5×25) (67×30.5×5) (67×30.5×25)
TCL-05SW2W TCS-05SW2W TTC-05SW2 BTC-05SW2W PTC-05SW2W
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P (50×65.5×25) (50×65.5×5) (50×65.5×25) (50×65.5×5) (50×65.5×6.5)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)

NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW 3P IP20 TCL-05SW3W TCS-05SW3W TTC-05SW3 BTC-05SW3W PTC-05SW3W
MB50-CW/SW (75×65.5×25) (75×65.5×5) (75×65.5×25) (75×65.5×5) (75×65.5×6.5)
NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P TCL-1SW2W TCS-1SW2W TTC-1SW2 BTC-1SW2W PTC-1SW2W
(60×65.5×40) (60×65.5×6.5) (60×65.5×40) (60×65.5×6.5) (60×65.5×6.5)
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, 3P TCL-1SW3W TCS-1SW3W TTC-1SW3 BTC-1SW3W PTC-1SW3W
NV125-RW, MB100-SW (90×65.5×40) (90×65.5×6.5) (90×65.5×40) (90×65.5×6.5) (90×65.5×6.5)
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)

2P TCL-2SW3W TCS-2SW3W TTC-2SW3 BTC-2SW3W PTC-2SW3W
NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, NV250-RW 3P (105×65.5×40) (105×65.5×6.5) (105×65.5×40) (105×65.5×6.5) (105×65.5×6.5)
MB225-SW
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW 2P IP40 TCL-2GSW3W TCS-2GSW3W TTC-2GSW3 BTC-2GSW3W PTC-2GSW3W

NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW 3P (105×84×40) (105×84×6.5) (105×84×40) (105×84×6.5) (105×84×6.5)
Notes: (1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of model designation for models with F-type operating handle. (Those are F-type operating-handle dedicated models,
and screws are used for fixing.)
(2) An F-type operating handle can be installed standardly.
Remarks: (1) Parenthesized numbers denote the outside dimensions (A×B×C in mm).
(2) The terminal cover for a four-pole model can be produced upon request.
Table 5-29
5
Large terminal cover Transparent terminal cover Rear terminal cover Plug- in terminal cover
(TC- L) (TTC) (BTC) (PTC)
A
Breaker type B
C Fig.1
A A A
B B
B
C C
A C
B
C Fig.2
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW TCL- 4SW3 ✳3 TTC- 4SW3 BTC- 4SW3 PTC- 4SW3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P (171✕99.5✕110) (171✕104.5✕110) (140✕99.5✕42) (140✕99.5✕42)
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW Fig. 1
TCL- 4SW3✳1 BTC- 4SW3 ✳1

NF400-UEW 3P — (140✕132.5/ 196.5✕42) —
(171✕132.5/ 196.5✕110)
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW, NV400-SEW/HEW TCL- 4SW4 TTC- 4SW4 BTC- 4SW4 ✳2

4P —
NF630-SW/SEW/HEW, NV630-SEW (240✕104.5✕110) (240✕104.5✕110) (185✕97.5✕39)
TCL- 8SW3 TTC- 8SW3 BTC- 8SW3 ✳2

NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV800-SEW/HEW 2P, 3P —
(224✕103.5✕155) (224✕103.5✕155) (210✕97.5✕32)
TCL- 8UW3 ✳1 BTC- 8SW3 ✳1,✳2

NF800-UEW 3P — —
(220✕146/ 194.5✕155) (210✕146/ 194.5✕32)
TCL- 8SW4 TTC- 8SW4 BTC- 8SW4 ✳2

NF800-SEW/HEW 4P Fig. 2 —
(294✕103.5✕155) (294✕103.5✕155) (280✕97.5✕32)
TCL- 8UW4 ✳1 BTC- 8SW4 ✳1,✳2

NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW 4P — —
(290✕146/ 194.5✕155) (280✕146/ 194.5✕32)
NF1000-SEW TCL-10SW3
2P, 3P — — —
NF1250-SEW/SDW (220✕139✕150)
NF1000-SEW TCL-10SW4
4P — — —
NF1250-SEW/SDW (290✕139✕150)
Remarks: 1. ( ) Shows external dimensions in mm. (A✕B✕C)

✳ 1. Line side/ Load side
✳ 2. These covers can be mounted on plug- in type.
✳ 3. Except for NF400/630-HEW/REW and NV400/630-HEW/REW.
60
5. Accessories
6. Electrical Operation Device

● 250A Frame and less
Table 5-30: Summary of Model Designations
(Note 1) NF125-CW(3P) NF160-SW/HW NF125-SGW/HGW
Applicable models NF125-SW(3P, 4P) NF250-CW/SW/HW NF160-SGW/HGW NV125-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW NV250-SEW/HEW
NF125-HW MB225-SW NF250-SGW/HGW
24V DC MDSD024-NF1SWE MDSD024-NF2SWE MDSD024-NF2GSWE MDSD024-NV1SWE MDSD024-NV2SWE MDSD024-NVE2SWE
Rated operating 48-60V DC MDSD060-NF1SWE MDSD060-NF2SWE MDSD060-NF2GSWE MDSD060-NV1SWE MDSD060-NV2SWE MDSD060-NVE2SWE
voltage
Compatible to 100-240V MDSAD240-NF1SWE MDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD240-NF2GSWE MDSAD240-NV1SWE MDSAD240-NV2SWE MDSAD240-NVE2SWE
AC/100-250V DC
Table 5-31: Specifications

Rated operating voltage Compatible to
24V DC 48-60VDC
(Allowable voltage range 85~110%) 100-240V AC/100-250V DC
ON action 0.05–0.1
Operating time (s) OFF action 0.6 or less
Charging action 1.2 or less
Power requirement (VA) 150
Note: (1) Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
Remarks: (1) The standard terminal cover can be used.
(2) Please contact us for details of the outside dimensions.
MDSD024 -NF2SWE MDSD024 -NV2SWE/NVE2SWE others

MDSD060 -NF2SWE MDSD060 -NV2SWE/NVE2SWE Control circuit MDS Module MDS Base
MDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD240-NV2SWE/NVE2SWE voltage

P.S
P1 K3
MDS Module MDS Base Uc Power SW1
Control circuit K2 K3
P2 Supply M
voltage X
P1 P.S K3
Uc Power SW1 Switching power supply S1 K2 SW2
K2 K3 P.S K3
Supply M (except for 24VDC model)
P2
X SW1 MANUAL/AUTO switch S2 K1
ON K2
K1
S1 K2 SW2 Limit switch (for spring condition
K3 SW2 S4
detection Charge/Discharge)
OFF K1
ON S2 K1 K2 M Motor (RESET) Breaker is OFF condition and MDS is charge condition
K1
K1 Relay(for Charge/OFF operation)
S4 K1 Switching power supply
OFF K2 Relay(for motor) P.S
(except for 24VDC model)
(RESET) K3 Relay(for motor)
L1 SW1 MANUAL/AUTO switch
X Pumping prevention circuit
Limit switch (for spring condition
ALa L1 Power LED indicator (red) SW2
L2 detection Charge/Discharge)
L2 Trip LED indicator (yellow)
M Motor
ALc
K1 Relay(for Charge/OFF operation)
Breaker alarm switch (AL) This refers to the status in which the circuit breaker K2 Relay(for motor)
● 400A
(for small current)
Frame and more and the electrical operation device is OFF. K3 Relay(for motor)
X Pumping prevention circuit
Motor-drive type (2) Spring-charged type

(MD) (MDS)
Table 5-32
NF- C series NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW — NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW —
NF400-SW NF1000-SEW NF400-SW NF1000-SEW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW NF1250-SEW NF400-SEW/HEW/REW NF1250-SEW
MCCB NF- S·H series NF630-SW NF1250-SDW NF630-SW NF1250-SDW
type NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SEW NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SEW
NF800-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SDW NF800-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SDW
NF- U, MB series NF400-UEW NF800-UEW — NF400-UEW NF800-UEW —

NV- C series NV400-CW NV630-CW — NV400-CW NV630-CW —
NV400-SW NV400-SW
ELCB NV400-SEW/HEW/REW NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
type NV- S·H series — —
NV630-SEW/HEW NV630-SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW
MN series — — — —
Electrical operation system Motor-drive type (2) Motor-drive type (2) Spring-charged type Spring-charged type
Rated operating voltage (V) 100/ 110VDC, 100/ 110VAC, 200/ 220VAC
(Allowable voltage range (125VDC, 240VAC)
85~110%) ✳1 OFF ON OFF ON
Operating DC 100/ 110V 3.0 (8.0) 4.0 (8.0) 1.0 (3.0) 8 1.0 (3.0) 9
current
(A, rms)✳2 100/ 110V 4.0 (8.0) 5.0 (10.0) 1.0 (3.0) 10 1.0 (3.0) 10
AC
200/ 220V 2.0 (4.5) 3.5 (7.0) 0.5 (1.5) 8 0.5 (1.5) 8
On 0.05 0.07
Operating time (s) Less than 0.3 (self- holding) Less than 0.3 (self- holding)
O ff Less than 3 (self- holding) Less than 3 (self- holding)
Required transformer capacity (VA) 400 700 700 70 0
Endurance voltage (V) 1500
✳ 1. ( ) voltages are special options and might require an external resistor. For details, consult your dealer.
✳ 2. ( ) shows starting currents.
61
General precautions for motor-operated electrical MCCBs Automatic Reset
● Motor-operated types have intermittent ratings, and therefore they ● Ifthe breaker is an auto reset type, it contains a built-in alarm
should not be operated more than 10 times consecutively (one switch and the off-control circuit closes when the breaker is tripped.
on/off counts as an operation). Since the breaker automatically resets itself after tripping, the
● The operating voltage should be between 85~110% of the rated power is easily restored by switching on the breaker again. With a
control voltage. UVT mounted, however, auto reset may not be possible. In this
● When the breaker is tripped by trip button or breakdown (i.e.,
case, please consult your dealer.
overload or short circuit), the breaker will not show that it has been
tripped (except for motor-operated type 1 breakers).
● The dielectric strength of the electrical operating circuits is 1500V.
When performing a dielectric strength test simultaneously with
another device at a voltage over 1500V, the operating circuit
terminal should be disconnected.
Electrically Operated MCCBs and ELCBs

Motor-operated type (2)
● Electrical operation 4. The electrical operating device is equipped with a pumping
Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball screw to prevention circuit. Although it is possible to set the device to OFF
switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset). while it is set to ON, it is impossible to return it to ON immediately.
● Manual operation To return to ON, first shut off the ON switch, then set it back to ON.
The manual operation handle can be used to switch the breaker ON 5. Special care is required during electrical operation because the
and OFF directly. manual operation handle moves at high speed. Also be sure to turn
● Cautions during electrical operation off the circuit power supply when using manual operation.
1. In case the UVT operates and a circuit breaker trips if the breaker 6. With manual operation, ensure that the handle is fully extended.
has a UVT, the re-closing procedure may differ according to the
state of the breaker before tripping.
When the circuit breaker trips while turned ON..... Reset (OFF) ->
Turn ON
When the circuit breaker trips while turned OFF..... Turn ON (idle
tripping) -> Reset (OFF) -> Turn ON
5
(If it fails to turn ON (idle tripping), please operate Reset (OFF) and
turn ON.)
2. Do not send ON and OFF signals consecutively. An interval of at
least 0.5s is required between each ON and OFF.
3. For models with auto reset capability, resetting after an NFB trip
should be performed after an interval of 0.5s.
Manual operation Internal structure
Control circuit
The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automatic-
reset type.
(1) Control circuit 1. (2) Control circuit 2.

(400,630 and 800AF) (NF1000-SEW to NF 1600-SEW)
breaker is OFF state
Earth terminal Earth terminal
(DC-)P2 X (DC-)P2 Z X X
Y
Operational Z Z Z Operational Z M Z
Y power supply T1
power supply Y M P1 Y Y
T1 X
P1 X Y Y X
T1 X Z
X Y X
Y
ON S2 X X
ON S2
T1 T1
OFF T2 Y LS
OFF T2 Y
RESET S4 Y LS RESET S4
95 T2 T2
95
ALa
ALa
M :Motor
X :Relay for ON operation
Y :Relay for OFF operation
Z :Relay for changing Motor polarity
T1 :Timer for antipumping
T2 :Timer for automatic reset
LS :Limit Switch
ALa :Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
62
5. Accessories
Spring-charged type
● Electrical operation Switching OFF a breaker with an electrical-operation device
When the ON switch is closed, the coil is excited to release the installed will take 3s. If instant opening is required, install an SHT or
latch mechanism and the force of the closing spring turns the UVT to the breaker.
breaker ON instantly. ● The breaker contains a built-in pumping-prevention relay.
When the OFF switch is closed, a relay starts the motor which turns
the breaker OFF and charges the spring simultaneously.
● Manual operation
Pressing the ON button will release the latch mechanism and the
force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly.
Pressing the leaf spring, pulling out the manual handle and pumping
it back and forth over 10 times will turn the breaker OFF and charge
the spring at the same time.
● Cautions during electrical operation
Whenever an electrical operation device is to be installed in or
removed from the breaker, the breaker must be tripped and the
device discharged.
Pushing the TRIP button on an MCCB with an electrical-operation Internal structure
device installed will not trip the breaker in the OFF state. This does
not mean the breaker is faulty.
Control circuit
The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automatic-
reset type.
Internal connection
CC.....Coil for making
Y.....Relay for pumping prevention
X.....Relay for self-sustaining on OFF side
Earth terminal LS1...Limit switch interlocking with cam
(DC-) P2 LS3 LS2...Limit switch interlocking with cam
LS3...Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plate
M....Motor
Operational X
M
power supply
P1 X X LS2
Y
Y
ON S2
LS1
OFF CC
RESET S4 Y
Ala
Alarm switch for automatic resetting (contact a)
63
Dimensions
Front connection
● NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HW

Insulation barrier Operating circuit Operating circuit
(removable) OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated terminal board terminal cover
Display hole (M3.5 screw) (standard supply)
(ON/OFF/TRIP)
Power supply module Center of the electrically operated
Manual handle
M8 screw 24 Circuit breaker
50
25
45
P1P2 S1S2S4 P1P2 S1S2S4
ø8.5
Remarks:
The 2-pole models are 3-pole models
110–111
8
R1 with the central pole removed.
78
111
130
86
80
The three-pole type only is available
39
41
40
Automatic/ max. 19
for the model NF125-CW, and the
manual 3-pole and 4-pole types only are
selection (Conductor thickness available for the model NF125-SW.
switch t=5 max.)
61
ON button 158 Conductor drilling for
60 30 30 30 direct connection
Front plate 163 M4x0.7 screw 88
Trip button 86 86
90 90 Display hole or ø5
90 (Charge/Discharge) 3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole Font-plate cut out
120
● NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250-CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW, MB225-SW

Electrical operation device Center of MDS
Insulating barrier Power supply indicator LED(Red) Control circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal Hex.socket head
(removable) (M3.5 screw)
Mounting screw Control circuit M8 bolt
TRIP indicator
OFFlock LED(Yellow) (M3 tapping screw) terminal cover
plate
Breaker condition's Manual handle
MANUAL/AUTO MDS Module Center of MDS
indicator 24
switch
15.5
(ON/OFF)
100
Breaker
Alarm switch AL
(micro loads use)
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 ø8.5 Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used

for the LED display for a trip
10
R1
indicator check.
2.2-pole breakers are 3-pole
86
80
78
144
165
126
breakers with the central pole
31
33
32
max. 24 removed.
(Bus t max=7)
3.NF250-CW is available in 2-and
3-pole only.
Terminal block Bus drilling for
ON button for alarm switch AL direct connection MB225-SW is available in 3-
MDS base connection
(M4 screw) 88 pole only.
100
(with terminal cover)

61 35 35
OPEN(TRIP)
158 M4X0.7 screw
button
70 163 or 5mm-dia. hole Font-plate cut out
35 Front panel 3-pole 4-pole
86 Drilling plan
90 86
105 90
105
140
● NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW, NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW

Operating circuit
Operating circuit
5
Insulation barrier OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated terminal cover
terminal board
(removable) Display hole (standard supply)
(M3.5 screw)
(ON/OFF/TRIP) Power supply M8 bolt (Hex-soket)
module Center of the electrically operated
Manual handle
11.5
24 Circuit breaker
50
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ø8.5
R1
78
10
86
144
165
126
80
35
32
37
Automatic/
max. 24
manual
selection
switch (Conductor thickness
t=7 max.)
ON button
79 35 88
50
Trip button Front plate 35 direct connection

70 176 M4x0.7 screw
86 35 3-pole 4-pole or ø5
181 Drilling plan Font-plate cut out
90 86
105 90 Display hole
105 (Charge/Discharge)
140
● NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125-HW

Insulation barrier Operating circuit
Operating circuit terminal cover
(removable) OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated terminal board
Display hole (standard supply)
(M3.5 screw)
(ON/OFF/TRIP) Power supply
module Center of the electrically operated
Manual handle
M8 screw 24 Circuit breaker
50
25
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ø8.5
110–111
R1
78
111
130
86
80
39
40
41
Automatic/ max.19
manual
selection (Conductor thickness
switch t=5 max.)
61
ON button Conductor drilling for
60 30 158
Front plate 163 30 30 88 direct connection
Trip button 86 86 Display hole
90 90 (Charge/Discharge) M4x0.7 screw
90 Test button 3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole or ø5 Font-plate cut out
120
● NV250-SEW, NV250-HEW
Insulating barrier Electrical operation device
Center of MDS Control circuit terminal
(removable) Power supply indicator LED(Red) Hex.socket head
Control circuit terminal (M3.5 screw)
Control circuit M8 bolt
OFFlock TRIP indicator Mounting screw
MANUAL/AUTO plate LED(Yellow) terminal cover
(M3 tapping screw)
switch
Breaker condition's Manual handle MDS Module
Alarm switch AL indicator 24 Center of MDS
15.5
Breaker
100
(micro loads use) (ON/OFF)

45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ø8.5
R1
10
Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used

86
80
for the LED display for a trip

78
144
165
126
indicator check.
31
32
33
max. 24 2.4-pole breakers are only

NV250-SEW.
(Bus t max=7)
Terminal block
ON button for alarm switch AL Bus drilling for
MDS base connection direct connection
(M4 screw) 88
100
(with terminal cover) 61 35 35

OPEN(TRIP) 158 M4X0.7 screw
button 70 Front panel 163 or 5mm-dia. hole
35 Font-plate cut out
86 Test button 3-pole 4-pole
86 Drilling plan
90
105 90
105
140
64
5. Accessories
Front connection
● NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation device Center line of breaker
231
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44
device and breaker 8
Breaker Operating circuit terminal Breaker
110
block M3.5 screw
70
194
120
257
277
44
44 M6 44
44
43
16
tap or ø7
94.5
112 22 28
ø14 195 2, 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56
231 255
Trip button 168
2, 3-pole
185 Drilling plan
196
4-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
● NF400-UEW (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker Insulating barrier Conductor thickness t=8 max. 127.5
Breaker 78
Operating circuit terminal block 8
Center line of breaker
M3.5 screw
110
Breaker
Center line of electrical operation device ø12.5
43
ø7
47
70
234
297
120
277
257
20
156
ø12.5
ø7
44
44 M6 tap or Ø7
110
16
43
141
191.5
28 292
112 ø14
Drilling plan
352
140 M12 bolt
Trip button
231
● NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW Motor drive type (2)

231
110
block M3.5 screw

70
194
120
257
277
44
44 M6 44
44
43
16
tap or ø7
94.5
112 22 28
ø14 195 2, 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56
231 255
Trip button 168
2, 3-pole
185 Drilling plan
196
4-pole
● NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW Motor drive type (2)

231
110
block M3.5 screw

70
194
120
257
277
44
44 M6 44
44
43
16
tap or ø7
94.5
112 22 28
ø14 195 2, 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56
231 255
Trip button 168
2, 3-pole
185 Drilling plan
196
4-pole
65
Front connection
● NF400-UEW 4-pole Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical Center line of breaker
operation device
ø14 143
M12 bolt Conductor 97
Insulating barrier thickness
35 t=8 max. 6.5
16
ø14
110
Breaker
ø7
48
Center line of
breaker
15
70
290
322
120
275
ø14
112
ø7
23.5
Center line of
48
electrical operation device 140
35 Neutral pole 6.5
Trip button
70 141
210 191.5
Operating circuit
280 terminal block 292 Drilling plan
231 M3.5 screw 352
● NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW Motor drive type (2)

Insulating barrier 231
Center line of electrical operation Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44
Breaker Operating circuit Breaker
110
terminal block M3.5 screw

70
194
120
257
277
44 Test button
44 44
44 M6
43
16
5
94.5 tap or ø7
112 22 28 195
ø14 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56 255
231 168
Trip button
185 Drilling plan
196
3-pole 4-pole
● NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW Motor drive type (2)

Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier Operating circuit terminal 46
device and breaker block M3.5 screw Conductor 8
thickness
110
t=12 max. Breaker

Breaker
70
275
243
120
277
44
Neutral
pole
15 32 8
87
70 M6 tap 70
46 or ø7
Trip button 140
35 40 2, 3-pole 4-pole
210 70 94.5
231 210 ø14 195 Drilling plan
280 M12 bolt 255
231
2, 3-pole 4-pole
● NF800-UEW Motor drive type (2)

Center line of breaker
Center line of electrical operation Center line of electrica 143
device and breaker operation device 40 Conductor thickness 64
Center line of breaker Insulating barrier 14 t=8 max. 8
15
Breaker
110
ø14
Breaker
8 32
87
Center line of electrical

ø7
operation device
15
322
70
290
290
120
277
275
112
ø14
ø7
44
23.5
87
70 M6 tap 140
Trip button 35 8 or ø7
140 143 3-pole 4-pole
70 Neutral pole
210 191.5
231 210 Operating circuit
280
292 Drilling plan
terminal block 352
ø14
231 M3.5 screw
M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
66
5. Accessories
Front connection
● NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW Motor drive type (2)
46
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier Conductor thickness
device and breaker 14 Breaker 8
t=12 max.
Breaker
110
87
70
243
120
277
275
Operating circuit
44 terminal block
M3.5 screw
8
70
87
M6 tap
32
46 or ø7
3-pole
Trip button 94.5
15
40
Test button 195 Drilling plan
140
210 255
231 ø14
3-pole M12 bolt
● NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1250-SDW Motor drive type (2)

280(4-pole) Center line of Conductor thickness
210(4-pole) 4-pole model t=8×2 max. 55
70 15
Insulating barrier
Bolt max.
Breaker
110
Operating circuit M12×50

terminal block
M3.5 screw
61
406
120
375
44
13
8
Neutral pole
80
70 70
15 32
59 M8 screw
43 or ø10
Center line of electrical 140
ø13 140 3-pole 4-pole
operation device and 231
M12 bolt 210(3-pole) 3-pole model 290 Drilling plan
● NF1600-SEW, NF1600-SDW Motor drive type (2)

Conductor thickness 55
60
ø 11 t=6×width 75 max. 20
38
15
Bolt max.
(185.5)
(185.5)
M10×65 Breaker
38
Operating circuit
terminal block
61
375
120
406
M3.5 screw
35
44 Center line of electrical 210
operation device 280
210
130
115
70 70 M8 screw
69.5 or ø10
101.5 140
203
304.5 231
263
364.5
3-pole 4-pole
290
Neutral pole Drilling plan
67
Rear connection
● NF1600-SEW (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)
Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated 90° Mounting angle Breaker
M3.5 screw Connection Conductor thickness
allowance t=6×width 75 max.
15
18.5
over 160
20
109
269
61
406
120
under
81.5
ø17.5
ø9.5
100
273
38 15
44
38
60
36
M8 tap
70 or ø10
ø11
140 231 125 38 15 212
M10×50 bolt
210 290 200 3-pole Drilling plan
● NF1600-SEW (4-pole) Motor drive type (2)

210 Operating circuit Mounting angle
Stud can be rotated 90°
terminal block Connection
35 allowance Mounting angle Breaker
M3.5 screw Conductor thickness
15 t=6×width 75 max.
18.5
over 160
20
109
269
61
406
120
273
ø17.5
ø9.5
under 100
81.5
44
54 18
38
15 5
38 18
231 60
70 20 ø11 106 106 M8 tap
290 125 M10×50 bolt 70 or ø10
Center line of electrical 210 318
operation device 280
4-pole Drilling plan
● NF1600-SDW Motor drive type (2)

Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated 90°
Mounting angle Breaker
M3.5 screw Connection Conductor thickness
allowance t=6×width 75 max.
15
18.5 over 160
20
109
61
375
406
120
233
38 15
over 175
36
44
ø17.5
38
60
ø11
ø9.5
M10×50 bolt 70 M8 tap

140 231 125 38 15 212
or ø10
210 290 200
3-pole
Drilling plan
● NF1600-SDW (4-pole) Motor drive type (2)

Operating circuit Mounting angle Stud is in horizontal direction.
210 Stud can not be rotated 90°.
terminal block Connection
35 M3.5 screw Mounting angle Breaker
allowance
Conductor thickness
15 t=6×width 75 max.
18.5
over 160
20
109
61
406
120
233
375
over 175
44
ø17.5
ø9.5
38
15
38 18
231 60
70 ø11 106 106
Center line of electrical 290 125 M10×50 bolt 70 M8 tap
210 318 or ø10
operation device
280
68
5. Accessories
7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI)

Table 5-33
Number Panel mouting Direct mount on
Applicable models of poles circuit breaker
Front connection, Rear connection, Plug-in Dimension A mm
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P 47.5 –
MI-05SW3
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW 3P – MI-05SWFB3
NF63-SW/HW 4P MI-05SW4 –
NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P 45 –
MI-05SW3
3P MI-1SWFB3
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW
4P MI-1SW4 –
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, 2P
MI-05SW3 MI-2SWFB3
MB225-SW, NV250-RW 3P –
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW 4P MI-2SW4 –
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW 3P MI-05SW3 MI-2GSWFB3
NF125-SGW/HGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/UGW 4P MI-2SW4 –
● Outside Dimension Diagram ● Drilling Dimension Diagram

(Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in) (Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in)
Notes: (1) When the panel plate thickness is
4ø (ø5.5 and ø7.5 countersunk (rear) (Note 1) ); 2.3 or more, prepare four holes
use M5×0.8 flat countersunk head screws to fix. (ø5.5 and ø9.5 countersunk (rear)).
44
22
Center of mechanical (2) These are standard dimensions for

interlock Machine this part according to
2- and 3-pole models, but can be
70 the front plate drilling dimensions
altered upon request.
of the main breaker.
63 (Note 3)
Center of circuit (3) The U series have different
15.5
13 breaker dimensions.
31
Center of mechanical
50 interlock Please contact us for details.
15 Panel plate thickness Remarks: (1) Please contact us for outside
Stroke (t1~3.2) Center of circuit dimensions of other models of
33
breaker
different specifications.
A
1.5
(2) These are not isolation-compatible.

(Gap between the circuit breaker and the panel) 120 (Note 2)
● Front, Rear, Plug-in Breaker mounting (front)

With two breakers, use a panel-mounted mechanical interlock for one-way only input. Type F G P
A breaker-mounting mechanical to mount on the breaker main unit can be made to order. Consult your MI- 4SWFB3 44 194 190
dealer for more details. MI- 8SWFB3 70 243 260
Front, Rear, Plug-in (panel mounting) Mechanical interlock
Breaker
22(30)
44(55)
Mechanical
Mechanical
22
44
interlock
interlock
E
Breaker
70 70(100)
Breaker
A Panel thickness Mechanical terminal mount

Stroke (t1.6~3.2mm) P
A Panel thickness
B
Stroke 1.5 47.5 Stroke

(t1~3.2mm)
B
Gap between panel

45
and breaker
Gap between panel External dimensions
94.5
and breaker
External dimensions Mounts to 4-5.5mm-dia hole,

7.5mm-dia countersunk (rear)*2
Differs with main
breaker unit drilling plan.
Mounts to 4-5.5mm-dia hole, External dimensions
7.5mm-dia countersunk (rear)*2 Differs with main Breaker
breaker unit drilling plan.
15.5(20)
15.5
Mechanical Mechanical
31(40)
31
interlock interlock
50
C
Breaker
G
Breaker
50(80)
D
P P
F F
P M6 screws
Mechanical interlock
( ) dimension are shown for NF1600-SS·NF1600-SSD or 7mm-dia
Drilling plan Drilling plan Drilling plan(breaker mount)
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
S1. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t=1.6~3.2mm.
S2. When the panel thickness is greater than t=2.3mm, use 4-5.5mm-dia 9.5mm dia countersunk (rear).
● Table of Altered Dimensions

Table 5-34
Breaker mount
Breaker type Pitch (P) ✳1 Dimensions (mm)
(✳4)
Special
Standard Standard C Type
MCCB ELCB Standard t A B D E Fig. Fig.
Type 2P 3P 3P Type 4P (✳3) 3P
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 190 83.5 MI- 4SWFB3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW MI- 4SW3 – 210 MI- 4SW4 250 47.5 33 – 74
NF400-UEW(3P) – – 190 (✳2) 63.5 –
Fig.1 Fig.3
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 220 – 83.5 MI- 8SWFB3
MI- 8SW3 240 – MI- 8SW4 290 47.5 33 – 74
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW – – 220 60 –
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW – M-10SW3 220 – – MI-10SW4 290 47.5 47 37.5 – – – –
2.3 Fig.2
NF1600-SEW/SDW – M-16SW3 315 – – MI-16SW4 426 65 54.5 39 – – – –
✳1. Specify the breaker mounting pitch (P)
✳2. No need to specify the panel thickness (t). (Usable panel thickness range: t=1~3.2mm. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t=1.6~3.2mm.)
✳3. For isolation purposes with 400/ 630/ 800AF models, keep the C dimension deviation within ±1mm.
✳4. Enquire for more details.
69
8. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder
Table 5-35
Description Lock cover (LC) Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL-S) (Note 2) OFF Lock with 3 Padlock Card holder
Appearance
NF30-CS, MB30-CS 2P
LC-03CS HL-05FH — —
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS 3P
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P (Note 1) HLS-05SW2P
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 3P HLF-05SW

LC-05SW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW HLN-05SW HLS-05SW
NF63-SW/HW 4P
NF125-CW/SW 2P
(Note 1) HLS-1SW2P
NF125-HW 2P
— CH-P No.5
HLF-1SW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW LC-1SW
3P HLN-1SW
MB100-SW, NV125-RW HLS-1SW
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P
(Note 1)
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW 2P
HLF-2SW
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 3P LC-2SW HLS-2SW
HLN-2SW
NV250-RW 4P
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW HLF-2GSW (Note 1)
3P, 4P LC-2GSW HLS-2GSW HLF3-2GSW
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW HLN-2GSW
Notes: (1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(2) HL-S types are used for OFF-lock.
Remark: (1) Users are requested to prepare padlocks for HL and HL-S types. (25mm padlock for HL, and 35mm padlock for HL-S.)
Table 5-36
Product Handle (HT) Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL- S) Card holder
5
Breaker type
NF400-CW, NV400-CW HT- 4C W HL- 4C W (✳1·2)

NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW HLS- 4SW (✳1)
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
HT- 4SW HL- 4S W (✳1·2)
NF400-UEW (3P) HLS- 4UW (✳1)
CH- P No.3
NF400-UEW (4P)
HLS-8SW (✳1)
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
HLS-8UW (✳3)
NV800-SEW/HEW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW/SDW HT-10SW HL (✳1) —
NF1600-SEW/SDW
Remarks:
1. Padlocks for HL and HL- S must be provided by the customer. ✳1. Must be ordered with breaker.
✳2. The HL without padlock can be used as a lock cover (LC).
✳3. Applicable types are NF400-UEW (4P) and NF800-UEW (3P, 4P).
9. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters Adapter for Adapter for

IEC 35mm rail M4×0.7 screw IEC 35mm rail
Table 5-37
Applicable models Number of poles Parts number Outline
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS 2P, 3P DIN-03CS Fig.1 3 6

100
C
35
35
35
CL CL L
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
2P DIN-05SW Fig.2
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW 5
3P
MB50-CW/SW
4
2P DIN-1SW2 8 1 13
NF125-CW/SW Mounting hook
3P
Fig.3 for IEC 35mm rail
2P DIN-1SW3
NF125-HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
3P
70
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF30-CS Series C series

Frame size 30
MB30-CS Type name NF30-CS MB30-CS
(2), (3.2), 4, (5), 1.4, 2.5, 4, 7.1,
Rated current In (Amp.) 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
6.3, (8), 10, 16 10, 16, 25, 32
Number of poles 2 3 2 (for single phase) 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500
breaking capacity (kA)

690V —
Rated short-circuit
500V —
IEC 60947-2
AC 415V 1.5/1.5
(Icu/Ics)
380V 1.5/1.5
240V 2.5/2
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 (2pcs)
(Front connection) Small terminal cover 2pcs Only MB30-CS
Type NF30-CS
■Operating Characteristics
3h
2h
Types
1h NF30-CS
40min MB30-CS
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s
30s Max.
20s
Operating time
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s Min.
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
×100% of rated current
■Internal Accessories ■Temperature Characteristics

Operating handle
Left-side Right-side Lead wire
AL AX 300
direction
change rate (%)
mounting mounting
Rated ambient
Operating time
250
200
150
2-pole
100
80
70
3-pole
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)

Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be
produced upon request.
(2) refer to page 44.
■External Accessories
Reference
Accessories Type name
page
Terminal cover
Small (TC-S) TCS-03CS3W (*1)

Large (TC-L) TCL-03CS3W (*1)
60
Rear (BTC) BTC-03CS3W (*1)
Skeleton (TTC) TTC-03CS (*1)
Handle lock (HL) HL-05FH 70
Lock cover (LC) LC03CS 70
Rail mounting adapters (DIN) DIN-03CS 70
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
71
Front connection
Mtg. hole M5 screw M4 × 0.7 taps or ø5

14.5 Applicable Breaker
wire size:1.6mm-dia.
to 14mm2
76.5
84
64
54
96
ø8.5
ø5.5
ø5
6
10
23.5 47 23.5
12.5 (max.)
28
45 67.5
49 2-pole 3-pole
Bus t max. =3
Drilling plan
2-pole 3-pole 3 52
Bus drilling for
direct connection
67
Rear connection
3-pole
M4 × 0.7 taps 2-pole
or ø5 Breaker
Mtg plate t max. =3.2 Breaker
R2
20
45 (min)
25 (min)
76.5
76.5
84
5
18
38.5
58.5
23.5 23.5 20
ø14
55 47
Insulating tube Front-plate cutout
8
Breaker mtg
M6 screw 2-pole 3-pole 1mm clearance on
M4 × 0.7 screw
each side of handle
2-pole 3-pole Drilling plan
IEC Rail Mounting Adapter

35mm IEC-rail adapter
for installation
6
100
35
31
4
52
Installation utensil
for 35mm IEC-rail 55
2-pole 3-pole 58
70
72
NF32-SW NF63-CW Type name NF32-SW NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW MB30-SW MB50-CW MB50-SW
0.8 1.2 1.4
NF63-SW NF63-HW Rated current In (Amp.)
3 4 (5) 6 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 10 (15) 16 20
(15) 16 20 25 16 20 25 (30) 32 16 20 25 (30) 32 25 (30) 32 40
2 2.5 4 5
8 10 12
16 25 32
0.8 1.2
1.4 2 2.5
7.1 8 10 12
(30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 40 50 (60) 63 50 (60) 63 40 45 4 5 7.1
MB30-SW MB50-CW 16 25 32
Number of poles 2∗1 3 2∗1 3 2∗1 3 4 2∗1 3 4 3 3 3
MB50-SW Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 690 500 500 500
braking capacity (kA)

690V – – – 2.5/1 – – –
Rated short-circuit
500V 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 7.5/4 – – –
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4
(Icu/Ics) 400V 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 5/2 5/2 7.5/4
230V 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8 25/13 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8
DC 250V 2.5/1 – 2.5/1 – 7.5/4 – 7.5/4 – – – –
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Note)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Note: These are supplied with NF63-SW, NF63-HW, and MB50-SW models.
✽ 1: Types of DC specifications can be produced upon request.
Type NF63-SW
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h DC use 2h AC use
AC use
1h 1h 1h
Types Types
Types
30min 30min NF32-SW 30min MB30-SW
20min
NF32-SW 20min NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW 20min MB50-CW MB50-SW
14min NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
2min 2min 2min

Max. Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min

Max.
30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s
Min. Min. Min.
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current

Breaker handle
2-pole Left-side Right-side 300
change rate (%)
Rated ambient
mounting mounting
Operating time
250
200
AL AX
150
SHT or UVT
3-pole 100
Lead wire 80
70
direction
Remark: (1) refer to page 44. –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Accessories Type name Reference Accessories Type name Reference
page page
F F05SW (*1) 55 Mechanical
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
S S05SW 57 interlock
Operating handle
V V05SWF 54 Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W (*1)
Terminal cover
R — — Large TC-L TCL-05SW3W (*1)

LC LC-05SW Skeleton TTC TTC-05SW3 (*1) 60
(*2)
HLF-05SW Rear BTC BTC-05SW3W (*1)
Handle lock device 70
HL HLN-05SW Plug-in PTC PTC-05SW3W (*1)
HL-S HLS-05SW (*1)
IEC 35mm rail DIN-05SW 70
mounting adapters
(option)
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
73
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) M5×0.8 screw Applicable M4×0.7 taps
(M6 for 60A and 63A) wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2 or 5mm dia.hole
Mounting hole
24 Breaker
50
111
130
111
84
50
φ4.5
φ8.5
Trip button
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 60A and 63A)
22 25 45
25 25
Neutral pole
6
25 50 75 61
50 75 100 68 12.5 max. 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
4 72 (Conductor thickness
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole t=5 max.) Drilling plan
90
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
2-pole 4-pole
Mounting panel M4×0.7 taps 3-pole

t=3.2max or 5mm-dia.hole
Insulation tube
Breaker Breaker
8
R1
111
111
52
8
50 M4×0.7 screw
for mounting breaker 25 22.5
M6 screw φ14
27 min.
25 25 50 70
68 42 25 50 75
1.0mm clearance on each side of

72
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole the handle frame.
6
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
Plug-in
M5×0.8 3-pole 4-pole

terminal block mounting screw 80 105
Mounting panel
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
50 75
Plug-in terminal block
3
25
54
11
180
Center line of
83.5
111
54
80
5.5 15.5 breaker body

16.5 max.
85
54
7
25
25 50
21 M6 screw
10 55 φ6.5
57 82 107
89 30 Conductor drilling
Details of terminal 2-pole for direct connection 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
6mm-dia.hole or
Cutout and drilling plan or M5×0.8 taps
74
NF125-CW NF125-SW Type name NF125-CW NF125-SW NF125-HW MB100-SW
(15) 16 20 (30) (15) 16 20 (30) (12.5) (16) (25)

NF125-HW MB100-SW Rated current In (Amp.) 50 (60) 63 (75)
80 100 125
32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60) 63 32 (40) 45 63
(75) 80 100 125 (75) 80 100 71 90 100
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690 500
690V – 8/4 10/5 –

500V 7.5/4 18/9 30/15 –
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 10/5 25/13 50/25 25/13
IEC 60947-2 400V 10/5 30/15 50/25 30/15
(Icu/Ics) 230V 30/15 50/25 100/50 50/25
250V 7.5/4 – 15/8 – 40/20 – –
DC ∗1 400V – 7.5/4 – 15/8 – 40/20 –
500V – – 15/8 – 40/20 –
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Note)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Note: These are supplied with NF125-SW, NF125-HW, and MB100-SW models.
∗1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and
4-pole models for up to 500 V DC.
Type NF125-SW
4h 4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h 2h
Tyeps Tyeps Tyeps
1h NF125-CW 50A~100A 1h 1h Tyeps 1h
NF125-SW 16A~20A MB100-SW 32A
NF125-SW 40A~100A NF125-CW 125A NF125-SW 32A
NF125-HW 16A~20A 30min NF125-SW 125A 30min
30min NF125-HW 40A~100A 30min MB100-SW 12.5A~25A NF125-HW 32A
20min MB100-SW 40A~100A 20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min 14min
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A) Max.
2min 2min 2min 2min
Max. (40A~50A) Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min 1min

Max.
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. Min.
2s 2s Min. 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s

AC AC
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
DC DC AC
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s Max. total
Max. total AC DC
Max. total breaking
0.05s breaking 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
breaking time time
time DC
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current Max. total ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
breaking time
Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB100-SW.
■Internal Accessories ■Ambient Compensating Curve

130
Operating handle
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
2-pole Left-side Right-side 120

mounting mounting
110
AL AX
3, 4-pole 100
SHT or UVT
Lead wire 90
direction
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) refer to page 44. Ambient temperature (°C)
Type name Reference Type name Reference
Accessories page Accessories page
F F1SW (*1) 55 Mechanical
interlock Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
S S1SW 57
Operating handle
V V1SW (*2) 54 Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*1)
Terminal cover
R R1SW 58 Large TC-L TCL-1SW3W (*1)

(*4) HLF-1SW Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*1)

HL HLN-1SW Pulg-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*1)
HL-S HLS-1SW (*1)(*4) IEC 35mm rail
DIN-1SW3 (*1) 70
mounting adapters
Electrical
operation device MDS-NF1SWE (*3) 61
(*2) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*3) Specify the working voltage. An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*4) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
75
Front connection
Insulation barrier
Solderless terminal
(removable)
for wire size
C
L C
L
Mounting hole M8 screw 14~2/0AWG CU/AL
C 24 Breaker
L C
L C
L C
L
50
(*1)110-111
C
L C
L
112
130
Wire connection
84
50
Trip
button
φ8.5 30 30
30 22 30 45
M4X0.7 taps
8
60 60 90 61
Neutral or 5mm-dia. hole
68
pole
90 120 19 max. 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
4 72
90
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
Rear connection
4-pole
4-pole
3-pole
Mounting base Breaker 2-pole 3-pole C
L
2-pole
102 C
L C
L C
L Breaker
Mounting plate Stud rotatable C
L C
L
t=3.2 max. 52 by 90°
(*1)110-111
C
L C
R1
112
1
R
52
8
C
L Connection
112
15 allowance
16
30 30 30 28
φ18 57
M4×0.7 86
8.5
60 30
5 breaker
M8 bolt
2.5
mounting screw 90
60
15 2.5 Insulation
90
M4×0.7 taps or 1.0mm clearance on each side
tube 5mm-dia. hole
68 54.5 15 of the handle frame.
72 104.5 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
6
Plug-in
3-pole 4-pole
M5×0.8 125
Terminal block 95
mounting screw 90
Mounting plate
60
30 C
L C
L C
L
56
11
C
L C
L
5.5 20
190
134
98
54
94
16.5 max.
12
56
30
21 30 60
φ8.5
12.5 65
M8 screw
89 30 67 97 127
Details of terminal Conductor drilling

2-pole for direct connection 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
6mm-dia. hole
or M5× 0.8 taps
Drilling plan
Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 110 and 111 both sides.
Remark: 2-pole model of NF125-HW are 3-pole model with the central pole removed.
76
NF250-CW NF250-SW Type name NF160-SW NF160-HW NF250-CW NF250-SW NF250-HW MB225-SW
(100) (100)
NF250-HW NF160-SW Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 160 125 150 160 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225
NF160-HW MB225-SW
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 3
690V – 5/3 – – 5/3 –

500V 15/8 30/8 10/5 15/8 30/8 –
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 25/13 50/13 15/8 25/13 50/13 25/13
IEC 60947-2 400V 30/15 50/13 18/9 30/15 50/13 30/15
(Icu/Ics) 230V 50/25 100/25 35/18 50/25 100/25 50/25
250V 15/8 – 40/20 – 10/5 – 15/8 – 40/20 – –
DC 400V – 15/8 – – 40/20 – – 10/5 – 15/8 – – 40/20 – –
500V – 15/8 – 40/20 – – 15/8 – 40/20 –
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
*1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and 4-pole models for
up to 500 V DC.
Type NF250-SW
■Operating Characteristics ■Ambient Compensating Curve

4h
130 Rated ambient
2h
Types
Curreny rating (%)
1h NF250-CW MB225-SW
120
NF250-SW NF160-SW
30min NF250-HW NF160-HW
20min 110
14min
10min
6min 100
4min
2min 90
Max.
Operating time
1min 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
30s
20s Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
■Internal Accessories
0.5s 250A AC
0.2s
Max. total Operating handle
125~225A AC breaking
0.1s
250A DC time Left-side Right-side
125~225A DC mounting mounting
0.05s
AL AX
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s SHT or UVT
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Lead wire
×100% of Rated current
direction
Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB225-SW.
page page
F F2SW 55 Mechanical
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
S S2SW 57 interlock
Operating handle
Terminal cover

(*4)HLF-2SW Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*1)
HL HLN-2SW Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*1)
HL-S HLS-2SW
Electrical
MDS-NF2SWE (*2) 61
operation device
(*2) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB225-SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*3) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
77
Front connection
Insulating barrier
(removable) M8 bolt
(Hex-soket) 24
30
Breaker
Mounting hole
100
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125 175A 14 95mm2
200 250A 70 125mm2
144
165
126
102
Wire connection
50
ø4.5
φ8.5
10
Trip button
100
φ8.5
45
35 35
22 35
Neutral 61 23 max.
M4×0.7 taps
pole or φ5
70 68
105
(Bus t max.=7)
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
105 140
Bus drilling for
92 Drilling plan
direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
3-pole
4-pole
Mounting plate Insulating Stud can be
tube rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
t max.=3.2
3-pole
Connection
8
1
allowance
126
144
52
144
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting 32.5
ø24 35
15 6 screw
35 35 100
15 φ9 70 M4×0.7
Insulating taps
M8 bolt tube
68 71
70 or φ5 105 1mm clearance
105
on each side
of handle
72 106 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan Front-plate cutout
6
Plug-in
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker (Terminal block)
Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block
34.5
allowance
Connection
58.5
144
200
54
80
14
22
70
6
58.5
153
28
15
M6 70 105
φ7
18 Terminal block
mounting screw 20 107
φ9 142
86 32 M8 bolt
Stud attachable in this 70 3-pole 4-pole
derection only Drilling plan
105 Insulating barrier
Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2- and 3-pole models are available for the model of NF250-CW, and only 3-pole models are available
for the model of MB225-SW.
78
NF250-SGW NF250-HGW Type name NF125-SGW

RT
NF125-SGW
RE
NF125-HGW
RT
NF125-HGW
RE
NF160-SGW
RT
NF160-SGW
RE
NF160-SGW NF160-HGW Rated current In (Amp.)

16–25, 25–40,
40–63, 63–100,
16–32, 32–63,
16–25, 25–40,
40–63, 63–100,
16–32, 32–63,
125–160 80–160
63–100, 75–125 63–100, 75–125
NF125-SGW NF125-HGW 80–125 80–125
Number of poles 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
690V 8/8 8/8 20/20 20/20 8/8 8/8
500V 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50 30/30 30/30

Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 36/36 36/36 65/65 65/65 36/36 36/36
IEC
400V 36/36 36/36 75/75 75/75 36/36 36/36
60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 230V 85/85 85/85 100/100 100/100 85/85 85/85
300V 20/20 – – 40/40 – – 20/20 – –
∗1
DC 500V – 20/20 – – – 40/40 – – – 20/20 – –
600V – 20/20 – – 40/40 – – 20/20 –
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type name NF160-HGW NF160-HGW NF250-SGW NF250-SGW NF250-HGW NF250-HGW

RT RE RT RE RT RE
Rated current In (Amp.) 125–160, 125–160

125–160 80–160 125–250 125–250
160–250 160–250
Number of poles 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
Type NF250-SGW 690V 20/20 20/20 8/8 8/8 20/20 20/20
500V 50/50 50/50 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 65/65 65/65 36/36 36/36 65/65 65/65

IEC
400V 75/75 75/75 36/36 36/36 75/75 75/75
60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 230V 100/100 100/100 85/85 85/85 100/100 100/100
300V 40/40 – – 20/20 – – 40/40 – –
∗1
DC 500V – 40/40 – – – 20/20 – – – 40/40 – –
600V – 40/40 – – 20/20 – – 40/40 –
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
∗1: Use either 2-pole. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 500 V DC, and 4-pole models for up to 600V DC.
4h 4h 4h 4h
Electric types
2h 2h 2h 2h
Thermal-Adjustable types NF125-SGW NF125-HGW
1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h NF250-SGW/HGW 160-250A (Rated current In=250A) 1h Note)
NF125-SGW/HGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A) NF125-SGW/HGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A)
NF160-SGW/HGW 125-160A (Rated current In=160A) Current setting Ir Rated current In
30min 16-25A (Rated current In=25A) 30min 40-63A (Rated current In=63A) 30min NF125-SGW/HGW 80-125A (Rated current In=125A) 30min 16~ 32A 32A
20min 20min 20min 20min 32~ 63A 63A
14min 14min 14min 63~ 100A 100A
10min 10min 10min 10min 75~ 125A 125A
Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip adjustment (Adjustable)
6min 6min 6min 6min
current ratio current ratio Max. range
4min AC DC 4min AC DC 4min Position AC DC 4min LTD operating time TL
x In (%) x In (%) x In (%) x In (%) of notch x In (%) x In (%) 12-60-80-100s ± 20%
2min 1000±200 1300±260 2min 1000±200 1300±260 2min 4 400±80 520±104 2min
Max. Max. (at 200%)
6 600 780
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min 1min

8 800 1040
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 10 1000±200 1300±260 30s

20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s

Min. Min. Pre-alarm STD pickup current IS
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min.
pickup current IP Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir × (0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s 2s 2s 2s -0.8-0.85-0.9
1s 1s
-0.95-1.0) ± 10%
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s (Adjustable range) Pre-alarm STD operating time TS
0.5s
DC operating time TP 0.3±0.06s
AC AC (Adjustable range)
Max. total Max. total Max. total TL 0.2±0.04s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
DC breaking breaking breaking 0.2s TP= ± 20%
time
DC
time time 2
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s (at 200%) 0.1±0.03s
0.06±0.02s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
INST pickup current Il
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
0.02s In × (4~14) ±15% Max.total breaking
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip time
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current × 100% of Current setting

Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
4h 4h
■Ambient Compensating Curve

Electric types Electric types
2h 2h
NF160-SGW NF160-HGW NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
1h 1h
Note) Note)
Current setting Ir Rated current In Current setting Ir Rated current In
30min
80~160A 160A 30min RT type RE type
20min 20min 125~250A 250A
(Adjustable) (Adjustable)
Derating of Load current (%)
10min 10min 130 130

Rated ambient
Rated ambient
6min
Current rating (%)
6min
4min LTD operating time TL 4min LTD operating time TL 120
12-60-80-100s ±20% 12-60-80-100s ± 20% 120
2min 2min
(at 200%) (at 200%)
110
1min 1min 110
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 100

20s 20s 100
10s 10s
90
Pre-alarm STD pickup current IS Pre-alarm STD pickup current IS 90
5s pickup current IP Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 5s pickup current IP Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 80
Ir × (0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10)±15% Ir × (0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ± 15% –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
80
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 2s -0.8-0.85-0.9
-0.95-1.0) ±10% -0.95-1.0) ± 10% Ambient temperature (°C)
1s 1s 70
0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time TS 0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time TS –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
operating time TP 0.3±0.06s operating time TP 0.3 ± 0.06s
TL 0.2±0.04s 0.2 ± 0.04s Ambient temperature (°C)
0.2s TP= ± 20% 0.2s TP = TL ± 20%
2 2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1±0.03s 0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
(at 200%)
0.06±0.02s 0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 0.05s
INST pickup current Il INST pickup current Il
0.02s In × (4~14) ±15% Max.total breaking 0.02s In × (4~14) ± 15% Max.total breaking
time time
0.01s 0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of Current setting × 100% of Current setting

Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In) Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
■Internal Accessories ■External Accessories

Reference Reference Notes:
Operating handle Accessories Type name Accessories Type name (*1) The designation depends
page page
Right-side Left-side on the number of poles.
mounting mounting AL AX F F2GSW 55 Mechanical
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69 Refer to the reference page.
S S2GSW 57 interlock (*2) HLF types are used for
SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Operating handle
OFF-lock, and HLN types
V V2GSW (*3) 54 Small TC-S TCS-2GSW3W (*1)
Terminal cover
for ON-lock.
R R2GSW 58 Large TC-L TCL-2GSW3W (*1) (*3) Attach the letter “F ” to the
LC LC-2GSW Skeleton TTC TTC-2GSW3 (*1) 60 end of designation for a
(*2) HLF-2GSW fixed type.
Handle lock device 70 Rear BTC BTC-2GSW3W (*1)
(*4) Specify the working voltage.
HL HLN-2GSW Plug-in PTC PTC-2GSW3W (*1)
HL-S HLS-2GSW
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock HLF3-2GSW 70 Electrical MDS-NF2GSWE
Remark: (1) refer to page 44. operation device (*4)
61
79
Front connection
Solderless terminal
Insulating barrier for wire size
(removable) 2.5 185mm2
M8 bolt
10
24
(Hex-soket) Breaker
Mounting hole
50
6.1
144
165
112
126
50
φ4.5
Hex-socket set screw
Trip Wire connection
50
φ8.5
button 22
φ8.5 35 35
22 35
63
10
Neutral M4×0.7 taps
70 105 pole 79 or φ5
86
3-pole 4-pole
105 140 24 max.
Drilling plan
4 90
3-pole 4-pole (Bus t max.=7)
110 Bus drilling for
direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
4-pole
3-pole
Mounting plate Stud can be
rotated 90° 3-pole Breaker
t max.=3.2 Breaker
Connection
8
1
144
126
144
52
R
allowance
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 32.5
15 φ24 35
6 mounting
screw
15 φ9 M4×0.7 100
70 Insulating 35 taps 35
M8 bolt
tube or φ5
86 71
105 70 105 1mm clearance
90 106 on each side
of handle
3-pole 4-pole
Front-panel cutout
6
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole Breaker (Terminal block)

Mounting plate 3-pole

54.5
54
4
allowance
Connection
66
94
M8 bolt
120
144
200
96
12 (Hex-soket)
54
103
48
110
70 105
φ7
10
48
15 107 142
M6 20
Terminal block ø9 M8bolt
3-pole 4-pole
86 30 45 mounting screw 70
Stud can be
rotated 90° Insulating barrier Drilling plan
(removable)
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
80
NF250-RGW NF250-UGW Type name

NF125-RGW
RT
NF125-UGW
RT
NF250-RGW
RT
NF250-UGW
RT
NF125-RGW NF125-UGW Rated current In (Amp.) 16–25 25–40 16–25 25–40 125–160 125–160
40–63 63–100 40–63 63–100 160–225 160–225
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4
690V 25/25 30/30 25/25 30/30

500V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
IEC 60947-2 400V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
(Icu/Ics) 230V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
300V – – – –
DC 500V – – – –
600V – – – –
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type NF250-RGW
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h Thermal-Adjustable types
NF250-RGW/UGW 160-225A (Rated current In=225A) NF125-RGW/UGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A) NF125-RGW/UGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A)
30min 125-160A (Rated current In=160A) 30min 40-63A (Rated current In=63A) 30min 16-25A (Rated current In=25A)
20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip
6min adjustment range 6min 6min
Max. current ratio current ratio
4min Position AC 4min AC 4min AC
of notch x In (%) x In (%) x In (%)
2min 4 400±80 2min 1000±200 2min 1000±200
Max. Max.
6 600
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min
8 800
30s 10 1000±200 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s

5s Min. 5s Min. 5s
Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
AC
0.5s (Adjustable range) 0.5s 0.5s
AC AC
Max. total Max. total Max. total
0.2s breaking
0.2s breaking
0.2s
breaking
time time time
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Operating handle
130
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
mounting mounting AL AX SHT or UVT 120
110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Remark: (1) refer to page 44. (rated ambient 40°C)
page page
F — Small TC-S TCS-2GSW3W (*1)
—
Terminal cover
S — Large TC-L TCL-2GSW3W (*1)

Operating handle
V V2GUW 54 Skeleton TTC TTC-2GSW3 (*1) 60
R R2GUW 58 BTC
Rear BTC-2GSW3W (*1)
Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SW3 (*1) 69
Plug-in PTC PTC-2GSW3W (*1)
Electrical operation device — — LC LC-2GSW
Handle lock (*2) HLF-2GSW
device HL 70
HLN-2GSW
HL-S HLS-2GSW
81
Front connection
Solderless terminal
Insulating barrier for wire size
M8 bolt
(removable) (Hex-soket) 2.5 185mm2 Breaker
24
26.5
10
Mounting hole
50
75
6.1
219
240
201
165
112
50
Hex-socket set screw
φ4.5
Wire connection
Trip
φ8.5
button 50 22
10
φ8.5
35 35
22 35 63
Neutral
pole 79 M4×0.7 taps
70 105 24 max. or φ5
86
3-pole 4-pole
105 140 4 90
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole 110 direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
Breaker 3-pole
Stud can be Breaker
t max.=3.2 rotated 90°
3-pole
73
11.5
108
219
201
219
8
Connection
allowance
52
R
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 32.5
15 6 mounting ø24 35
screw
φ9 M4×0.7 100
15 M8 bolt 35 35
70 taps
Insulating
tube or φ5
86 71 70 105 1mm clearance
105 on each side
90 106 3-pole 4-pole of handle
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal Breaker

Mounting plate block (Terminal block)
34.5
Connection
58.5
22 allowance
129
155
275
219
14
15
70
153
6
58.5
28
Stud attachable in this φ7

70
18 derection only φ9 M8bolt
M6 20
Terminal block 107
104 32 mounting screw Insulating
70 barrier
Drilling plan
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
82
NF400-CW Type name NF400-CW NF400-SW

Rated current In (Amp.) 250 300 350 400
NF400-SW Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4

690V – 10/10
Rated short-circuit
500V 15/8 30/30
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 25/13 42/42
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 45/45
230V 50/25 85/85
DC(*1) 250V 20/10 40/40
Front Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Standard Attached Parts
Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
connection
Type NF400-SW Note: (*1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, 3-pole models can be
used for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Type 1h Type
NF400-CW NF400-SW
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Max. Max.
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max. total 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of Rated current % of Rated current

Operating handle
Reference ambient
130
Current rating (%)
AL AX SHT or UVT direction

temperature
mounting mounting 120
110
100
(*1)
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(*1) (*1) (*1) (Reference ambient temperature 40°C)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name Reference Reference

page Accessories Type name page
Terminal cover
F F4SW 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)

Operating handle S S4CW, S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*1) 60
V V4SWF, V4SW 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1) 69 Handle HL HL-4CW, HL-4SW
70
lock device HL-S HLS-4SW
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4CW, HT4SW 70
Electrical operation device 61
83
Front connection
94.5
Insulating barrier (removable)
44
28
Conductor thickness 8 4-pole
16
t=8 max. 3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Breaker
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
47
92
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
25
39
ø10.5
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
ø14 97 direct connection
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each side of the
112 185 3-pole 4-pole handle frame.
140 196 155 (NF400-SW) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134 (NF400-CW)
3-pole 4-pole
Boring dimensions for rear connection type

Rear connection barriers (3-pole)
Stud can be rotated 90° 4-pole Line side

Breaker Groove for reducing
Mounting plate
3-pole heat by overcurrent 6-ø35
8
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker ø35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulation tube 87 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 43.5 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows

the breaker viewed from the rear.
6
Plug-in
4-pole
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block 3-pole
Breaker
35
55
M8 terminal block Connection

280
225
allowance
135
163
24 mounting screw
24
8
79
55
160
ø10
15
28
28
18 Stud attachable in this 44 87

direction only
121 136 181
87
ø13 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: (1) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
84
NF400-SEW Type name NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW

200-400
NF400-HEW Rated current In (Amp.)
adjustable
NF400-REW Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690

690V 10/10 35/18 —
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Rear Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
connection
Type NF400-SEW
10h
5h Types
NF400-SEW
2h NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
1h
Current setting Rated Current
LTD operating time Ir: 200~400A In: 400A
30min
at 125% (Adjustable)
20min
14min 1000s(TL=150s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s
Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
0.02s INST pickup current II Max. total

x4~x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In) breaking time
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current setting (×100% of Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)

Operating handle
Continuous load current (%)
Rated ambient
Lead wire 130

Left-side Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT PAL TI
mounting mounting direction 120
110
100
(*1)
90
80
(*1) (*1) (*1) 70

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Accessories Reference Reference

Type name page Accessories Type name page
Terminal cover
F F4SW 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)(*2)

Operating handle S S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*2) 60
V V4SWF, V4SW 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)(*2)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*2) 69 Handle HL HL-4SW
70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70 lock device HL-S HLS-4SW
Electrical operation
61
device
Notes: (*1) This is for NF400-SEW.

(*2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
85
Front connection
94.5
44
28 Conductor thickness
8 4-pole
t=8 max.
16
110
Breaker 3-pole
43
Breaker
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
59
92
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
25
39
ø10.5
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
ø14 97 direct connection
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each side of
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole the handle frame.
140 196
3-pole 4-pole
Boring dimensions for rear connection

Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-pole Groove for reducing Line side

Stud can be Breaker heat by overcurrent
Mounting plate rotated 90° 3-pole 6-ø35
8
24 24
8
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker ø35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulation tube 87 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 43.5 44
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan

6
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 3-pole Breaker
35
55
M8 terminal block Connection

280
225
allowance
135
163
24 mounting screw
24
8
79
55
160
ø10
15
28
28
18 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181
87
M12 bolt 130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
86
NF400-UEW Type name NF400-UEW

200-400
adjustable
Number of poles 3 4

690V —
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Front Mounting screw: M6×65 (2pcs), M6×174 (2pcs)
Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (2pcs), M6×181 (2pcs)
connection
Type NF400-UEW
10h
5h
Type
NF400-UEW
2h
1h Current setting Rated Current

LTD operating time Ir: 200~400A In: 400A
30min (Adjustable)
at 125%
20min
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s 2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
0.02s INST pickup current II

x4~x16 ±15% Max. total
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current setting (×100% of Ir)

■Internal Accessories ■Current reducing curve

Operating handle
130
Rated ambient
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire

AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI
110
100
(*1)
90
80
(*1) (*1) (*1)
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side
mounting.
Remark: (1) Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF800-UEW.

Terminal cover
F F4UW (*1) 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1) 60

Operating handle
S S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) — —
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1) 69 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1) 60
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70 Handle HL HL-4SW
70
lock device HL-S HLS-4UW
61
device
Note: (*1)The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
87
Front connection
Insulating barrier (removable) 127.5
Conductor thickness 78 Breaker

110
t=8 max. 8
Breaker
43
ø7
26
ø12.5
Mounting hole
R6
47
31
297
11.5
234
257
102
92
156
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
25
39
ø10.5
43
44 M6 tap or ø7
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
16
141 118
Conductor drilling for direct connection
191.5
ø14
51 M12 bolt 194
1.0mm clearance on each side
28 200
of the handle frame.
112 5 204 3-pole
140 252 Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole

Groove for reducing Line side

Mounting plate Breaker heat by overcurrent
Stud can be rotated 90° 6-ø35
8
24 24
8
M6 screw or ø7
Connection 4-M6 tap or ø7
234
265
allowance
305
265
234
265
25 20 20
14
24 24
26
83
128
11 11
8-M4 screw
M6 screw for ø35
10 Add these tapped holes in
mounting breaker 44
ø13 44 8 positions to standard boring.
210 8
M12 bolt 87
87
87 Insulation tube
Load side

6
Plug-in

Breaker
35
Mounting angle
Mounting angle
max. 203
Connection
320
297
265
175
M8 terminal block allowance

24 mounting screw
24
79
8
160
28
15
Stud attachable ø10

28
18 in this direction only
44
218 ø13 87 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 3-pole
Note (1): Overall dimension of 4-pole model is same as that of 4-pole model of NF800-UEW. Refer to page 98.
88
NF630-CW Type name NF630-CW NF630-SW

Rated current In (Amp.) 500 600 630
NF630-SW Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690

690V – 10/10
Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 36/18 42/42
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 50/50
230V 50/25 85/85
DC(*1) 250V 20/10 40/40
Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
connection Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
Type NF630-SW Note: (*1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, 3-pole models can be used
for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Type 1h Type
NF630-CW NF630-SW
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Max. Max.
30s 30s
Operating time
Operating time
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max.total 0.1s Max.total
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of Rated current % of Rated current

Operating handle
Reference ambient
130
AL AX SHT or UVT
Current rating (%)
mounting mounting direction

temperature
120
110
(*1) 100
90
(*1) (*1) (*1) 80

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. (Reference ambient temperature 40°C) Ambient temperature (°C)

Type name Accessories Type name
page page
Terminal cover

70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70
89
Front connection
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL 4-pole
Bus 44
28
t max.=10 8 30 3-pole
ø10.5
CL
110
16
Bus t max.=10 Breaker
CL
Bus drilling for
43
direct connection
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
102
CL CL
92
59
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
39
194
CL
Neutral pole 44 118
97
ø14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or ø7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196

4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
rotated 90° 3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-ø35
CL CL
24 24
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or ø7 4-M6 tap
or ø7
225
265
194
225
225
194
CL CL
14
25 20 20
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped
113 87 Insulating tube 87 43.5
M12 bolt 44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center &
neutral poles
3-pole 4-pole Load side
Drilling plan
6
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance
225
280
163
135
CL 25 M8 terminal block CL
mounting screw
25
10
93
55
28
160
ø10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181

110
M12 bolt 165.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: (1) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
90
NF630-SEW Type name NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW

300-630
NF630-HEW Rated current In (Amp.)
adjustable
NF630-REW Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690

690V 10/10 35/18 —
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
connection
Type NF630-SEW
10h
5h Types
NF630-SEW
2h NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
1h
LTD operating time
30min Ir: 300~630A In: 630A
at 125%
20min (Adjustable)
1000s(TL=150s set)
14min
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
INST pickup current II

0.02s x4~x15 ±15% Max. total
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current (×100% of Ir)


Operating handle
Rated ambient
130
AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI 120
mounting mounting
110
100
(*1) 90
80
(*1) (*1) (*1) 70

0 10 20 30 40 50 60

page page
Terminal cover

70
61
device
91
Front connection
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL 4-pole
Bus 44
28
t max.=10 8 30 3-pole
ø10.5
CL
110
16
Bus t max.=10 Breaker
CL
Bus drilling for
43
direct connection
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
102
CL CL
92
59
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
39
194
CL
Neutral pole 44 118
97
ø14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or ø7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196

4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
rotated 90° 3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-ø35
CL CL
24 24
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or ø7 4-M6 tap
or ø7
225
265
194
225
225
194
CL CL
14
25 20 20
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped
113 87 Insulating tube 87 43.5
M12 bolt 44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center &
neutral poles
Drilling plan
6
Plug-in
4-pole
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
225
280
163
135
CL 25 M8 terminal block CL
mounting screw
25
10
93
55
28
160
ø10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181

110
M12 bolt 165.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
92
NF800-CEW Type name NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW

400-800
NF800-SEW Rated current In (Amp.)
adjustable
NF800-HEW Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4 3
NF800-REW

690V — 10/10 15/15 —
Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 36/18 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 36/18 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 85/85 100/100 150/75

Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Type NF800-SEW
10h
5h Types
NF800-CEW
NF800-SEW
2h NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
1h
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current
30min
at 125% Ir: 400~800A In: 800A
20min
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
14min
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s

0.02s x4~x12 ±15% Max. total
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

■Internal Accessories ■Current Reducing Curve

Working current correcting ratio (%)
Operating handle
130
temperature
AX SHT or UVT PAL TI

Reference
mounting mounting direction 120

ambient
110
The rated current does not
100 depend on temperature.
However, if ambient
(*1) (*1) 90 temperature exceeds 40°C,
reduce the continuous
80
working current as left
(*1) (*1) 70 curve.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Terminal cover

70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70
93
Front connection
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
t=12 max. 46
4-pole
8 3-pole
110
Breaker
87
32
Breake
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
Terminal dimension for R6
directly connecting
243
102
275
conductor
15
92
32
ø8
N
8
ø8.5
ø14
8
87
14
32
12
70 M6 tap 70 51
46
22 or ø7 172
Trip button
15
51 70 97
40
40 210 103
Neutral pole 1.0mm clearance on each
140
5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.) 3-pole 4-pole side of the handle frame.
210 280
ø14 Conductor drilling for direct connection
M12 bolt 155
3-pole 4-pole 217

Stud can be rotated 90° M6 tap or ø7

25 Breaker Groove for reducing
Mounting plate heat by overcurrent 6-ø48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
295
243
243
12.5
13
45
24 24
10
8 70
8 32 15 70
140 11 11 8-M4 screw
113 110 ø13 M6 screw for 140 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
M12 bolt mounting breaker 210
140
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker
56
20
155
187
243
301
13
10
112
56
32
25
15
40 70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw ø10
140 ø13 208 278
126
M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
94
NF800-SDW Type name NF800-SDW

Rated current In (Amp.) (700), 800
Number of poles 2
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) 690

Rated short-circuit
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant DC 250V 40/40
not larger than
10ms

Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Type NF800-SDW
4h
2h
Type
1h NF800-SDW
30min 700A,800A
20min DC
14min
10min
6min
Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps)
2min Control Inst trip

setting current (A)
Max.
Operating time
1min. Lo 2600±520
2 3900±780
30s 3 5200±1040
20s Hi 6500±1300
10s
Min.
5s
2s
Adjustment
range
1s 700A
0.5s
Adjustment
0.2s range
800A
0.1s
Max. total
interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Inst trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Operating handle
Rated ambient
130
AX SHT or UVT
Current rating (%)

120
110
(*1) (*1) 100
90
(*1) (*1) 80
Rated ambient 40°C 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Ambient temperature (°C)

Terminal cover

70
61
device
95
Front connection Breaker
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
46 4-pole
t=12 max.
3-pole
8
110
Breaker
87
32
Auxiliary handle
(removable) Terminal dimension for R6
70 M6 tap or ø7
directly connecting
conductor
102
275
92
3-pole
15 ø8.5
12
N
ø8
8
22
ø14
8
32
87
14 51
32
40 172
243
46
15
Trip button 51 70 97
1.0mm clearance on each
40 210 103 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Neutral pole side of the handle frame.
140
5 107
210 280 Conductor drilling for direct connection Front-panel cutout
ø14
M12 bolt 155 70
3-pole 4-pole 217
4-pole
Drilling plan

M6 tap or ø7
Connection allowance Stud can be rotated 90°
25 Breaker Groove for reducing heat
Mounting plate by overcurrent 6-ø48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
295
243
243
12.5
13
45
24 24
10 8
70
70
8 32 15 140 11 11 8-M4 screw
ø13 M6 screw for 140 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
113 110 M12 bolt mounting breaker 210
140
3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90°
Plug-in terminal block Breaker

56
20
155
187
243
301
13
8
112
56
32
25
15
40
70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw ø10
140 ø13 208 278
M12 bolt
126
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF800-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
96
NF800-UEW Type name NF800-UEW

400-800
adjustable
Number of poles 3 4

690V 35/35
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Mounting screw: 3P: M6×35, M6×132 (2pcs each)
Front 4P: M6×35 (3pcs), M6×132 (2pcs)
Standard Attached Parts connection
(4-pole models are provided Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
with auxiliary handle.) Mounting screw: 3P: M6×40, M6×137 (2pcs each)
Rear
connection 4P: M6×40 (3pcs), M6×137 (2pcs)
Type NF800-UEW
10h
5h Type
NF800-UEW
2h
1h Current setting
LTD operating time Ir: 400~800A Rated Current
30min
at-125%
20min (Adjustable) In: 800A
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s
Tp=
2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
0.02s INST pickup current II Max. total

x4~x12 ±15%
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40


Operating handle
130
Rated ambient

AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI
110
100
(*1) (*1) 90
80
(*1) (*1) 70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

page page
Terminal cover
F F8UW(*1) 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-8UW3 (*1) 60

Operating handle S S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) — —
V — — Rear (BTC) BTC-8SW3 (*1) 60
70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70 lock device HL-S HLS-8UW
device 61
97
Front connection

143 44 (ON side)
Mounting hole
123.5 (OFF side)
t=12 max.
110
87
Auxiliary handle
ø14
ø7
(removable)
27.5
15 Terminal dimension for
322 directly connecting
275
102
112 conductor
ø8.5
ø7
N
12
8
ø14
8
22
87
14
32
143 4-pole
40
Trip button 51 194 3-pole
70
15
200 Breaker
40 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
210 Neutral pole 5 204
140
210 280 252 Conductor drilling for
ø14
22.5
M12 bolt 314 direct connection R6
3-pole 4-pole
143
92
Conductor
Insulating barrier (removable) thickness 97
Mounting hole t=8 max.
6.5
70
Auxiliary handle
110
ø14
Breaker (removable) 51
ø7
48
172
27.5
side of the handle frame.
15
322
290
275
Front-panel cutout
102
112
ø7
16
N
48
ø14
70 70 Trip button
6.5
M6 screw or ø7 51 35
3-pole 4-pole 141
Neutral pole
Drilling plan 70
ø14 194
210 M12 bolt
200
280
5 204
252
NF400-UEW 4-pole
314
Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection

type barriers (3-pole) 6
M6 tap or ø7
Standard direction of stud is horizontal Groove for reducing
Connection on power side, and vertical on load side. Breaker heat by overcurrent Connection
Mounting plate allowance Otherwise, specify the direction. allowance Stud can be
Mounting plate 6-ø48
rotated 90˚
5
25 25
5
24 24
10
8
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
290
290
290
342
290
342
12.5
13
26
45
24 24
11 11 8-M4 screw
8 32 15 70 20
10 10 10 70
70 8 positions to standard boring.
ø13 M6 screw for ø48 ø13
210 110 140 140 210 83 140
M12 bolt mounting 210 M12 bolt
breaker
3-pole 4-pole NF400-UEW 4-pole
Drilling plan
98
NF1000-SEW Type name NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW

500–1000 600–1250
NF1250-SEW Rated current In (Amp.)
Adjustable Adjustable
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690

690V 25/13 25/13
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43 85/43
230V 125/63 125/63
Front
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Rear
Type NF1250-SEW connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
10h 10h
5h 5h
Type Type
NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW
2h 2h
Current setting Rated Current Current setting Rated Current
1h 1h LTD operating time
LTD operating time at-125% Ir:500-1000A In:1000A Ir:600-1250A In:1250A
1000s(TL=150s set) at-125% (Adjustable)
30min (Adjustable) 30min
670s(TL=100s set) 1000s(TL=150s set)
20min 400s(TL= 60s set) 20min 670s(TL=100s set)
14min 80s(TL= 12s set) 14min 400s(TL= 60s set)
10min 10min 80s(TL= 12s set)
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min LTD operating time TL 2min LTD operating time TL

12-60-100-150s ± 20% 12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%) (at 200%)
Operating time
1min
Operating time
1min
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s Pre-alarm 10s Pre-alarm

pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is
5s In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 5s In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10% -5-6-7-8-10) ± 15% -0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10% -5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts

Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
operating time Tp 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.3 ± 0.06s
TL ± 20%
0.2s TL ± 20% 0.2 ± 0.04s 0.2s Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
Tp= 2
2
(at 200%)
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s 0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 0.05s
INST pickup current II INST pickup current II
x (4~x12) ± 15% x (4~x12) ± 15%
0.02s 0.02s
(Magnification to In) Max. total (Magnification to In) Max. total
breaking time breaking time
0.01s 0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (of Ir) Current (of Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current (of In) Instantaneous tripping current (of In)
■Internal Accessories ■Current reduction curve

Operating handle
130
Rated ambient

AX SHT or UVT direction PAL
110
100
90
80
70
Remark: (*1) refer to page 45. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

page Accessories Type name page
F F10SW (*1) 55 Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
Operating handle 70
S S10SW 57 Handle lock (HL)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-10SW3 (*1) 69 Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-10SW3 (*1) 60
99
Front connection
Conductor thickness 15 40
t=8 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
110 Mounting Breaker
hole
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
346
406
375
ø9.5
13
15 32 8
ø17.5
80
18.5
Neutral pole 70 M8 tap or ø10 70
15 44
43 70 133.5
17 3-pole 4-pole
140 210 140
ø13 M12 bolt 210 280 190
280 Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
3-pole Breaker
M8 screw for mounting breaker Breaker
35.5
86
R11.5
109
269
97
18 Connection
273
39.5
81.5
allowance
ø13
22
Conductor thickness
13
86
45
t=6 × 2pcs max.

Bolt M12 × 45 70 70 80
12
8 32 15 140 230 300 1.0mm clearance on each
Insulation cover side of the handle frame.
140 97 M8 tap or ø10
(removable)
3-pole 4-pole Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block Breaker
M10 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90° 28.5

136
269
6
105
100.5
25.5
269
13
28.5
225
30
15 32 8
104
136
12
Connection
allowance ø12
ø13
Insulating 70 140
t=6 × 2pcs max. 140
barrier 204 274
68
Bolt M12 × 45
208 134 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
100

Rated current In (Amp.) 1000, 1250
Number of poles 2
Rated short-
circuit breaking
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 40/20
DC 250V
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant
not larger than
10ms
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Front Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Standard Attached
Parts Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Rear
Insulating cover: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
connection
Type NF1250-SDW Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
3h 3h
2h 2h
1h 1h
Type Type
40min 40min
NF1250-SDW NF1250-SDW
1000A 1250A
20min 20min
DC DC
Maximum
10min 10min
Maximum
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
40s 40s
Inst. trip adjustment range
30s
Operating time
30s Minimum
Operating time
(4 steps)
20s Inst. trip adjustment range 20s
Minimum
(4 steps) Control Inst. trip
10s 10s setting current(A)
Control Inst. trip
6s setting current(A) 6s L0 2800 ± 700
4s L0 2800 ± 700 4s 2 4200 ± 700
2 4200 ± 700 3 5600 ± 700
2s 2s
3 5600 ± 700 Hi 7000 ± 700
1s Hi 7000 ± 700 1s
0.6s 0.6s
0.4s 0.4s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.06s Max. total 0.06s Max. total
0.0.4s 0.0.4s
Time 0.02s Time
0.02s
delay trip Inst. trip delay trip Inst. trip
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70
Current (×100% of rated current) Current (×100% of rated current)

130
Operating handle 1000A
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)

AX SHT or UVT direction
120
mounting mounting
110
1250A
100
90
80
5 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) refer to page 45. Ambient temperature (°C)
Reference Reference
Accessories Type name page Accessories Type name
page
Operating handle 70
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-10SW3 (*1) 69 Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-10SW3 (*1) 60
101
Front connection Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
Insulating barrier
(removable) Conductor thickness 15 40
t=8 × 2pcs max.
Mounting hole
Bolt M12 × 50 Breaker
110
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
406
375
346
ø9.5
13
15 32 8
ø17.5
80
18.5 70 70
15 44 M8 screw or ø10
43 70 133.5
140 210 17 140
ø13 M12 bolt 3-pole 4-pole
210 280 190
280
Rear connection Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Breaker
35.5
M8 screw for mounting breaker 3-pole Breaker
18 Stud can be rotated 90˚

86
187.5
109
R11.5
375
233
97
22 ø13
13
86
Conductor thickness
45
t=6 × 2pcs max.

Bolt M12 × 45
20.5
18 12 70 70
80
140 230 300
8 32 15 Insulation cover
(removable) M8 screw or ø10
140 97 1.0mm clearance on each side
3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
6
Plug-in Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block M10 terminal block mounting screw Breaker
Stud can be rotated 90˚
248
318
375
48
12
13
30
104
8
32
15
Conductor thickness 43 70 140

t=6 × 2pcs max. ø13 140
68 25.5 204 274
ø12
208 134 Bolt M12 × 45 Insulating barrier 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remarks: (1) Standard specifications of NF1250-SDW is 2-pole models. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.
102
NF1600-SEW Type name NF1600-SEW

Adjustable
800–1600
Number of poles 3 4

690V 25/13
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43
230V 125/63
Front
connection
Standard Attached Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Parts
Rear Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Type NF1600-SEW
10h
5h
Type
2h NF1600-SEW
1h LTD operating time at-125% Ir:800-1600A In:1600A
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
20min 400s(TL= 60s set)
14min 80s(TL= 12s set)
10min
6min
4min
2min
12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is
5s In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10% -5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
2s
1s
0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts

operating time Tp
0.3 ± 0.06s
TL ± 20% 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s Tp=
2
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
0.02s x (4~12) ± 15%
(Magnification to In) Max. total
breaking time
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (of Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current (of In)

Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire 130
Rated ambient
AX SHT or UVT direction PAL

mounting mounting
120
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Reference Reference
Accessories Type name page Accessories Type name page
Operating handle 70
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-16SW3 (*1) 69 Electrical operation device 61
103
Front connection
Conductor thickness t=6 × W75 max.

Insulating barrier 60 20 35
(removable) ø11 4-pole
38
Bolt M10 × 65 3-pole
38 15
Breaker
(185.5)
(185.5) Auxiliary handle Breaker

(removable)
Mounting hole 18.5

210 280
R11.5
406
97
346
375
ø17.5
ø9.5
N
115
130
80
M8 tap or ø10
20 49.5 70 70
203 133.5 1.0mm clearance on each side
101.5
Neutral pole 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
263 304.5 17 140
364.5 190
280
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
Connection 15 38 15
allowance
38
60
106 106
18
318
212
Stud can be rotated 90˚ Stud can be rotated 90˚

Breaker Mounting angle
Mounting angle Conductor thickness Mounting angle Conductor thickness
t=6 × W75 max. t=6 × W75 max.
160 min.
20
20
269
100 max.
109
109
273
273
15 Connection
81.5
allowance
18
38
M8 tap or ø10
60
36
70 70
54
15
140
38 38 ø11 70 3-pole 4-pole
ø11
125 15 BM10 × 50 bolt 210 140 125 M10 × 50 bolt
3-pole 140 200 4-pole Drilling plan
104

Rated current In (Amp.) 1600
Number of poles 2
Rated short-
circuit breaking
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 DC 250V 40/20
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant
not larger than
10msec
Front Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Standard Attached
Parts
Rear Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Type NF1600-SDW
4h
Type
2h NF1600-SDW
for MAG-ONLY
1h
1600A
30min DC
20min
Max. allowable time of Overcurrent
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
Inst. trip adjustment
10s range (4 steps)
5s Contro Inst. trip

settingl current(A)
2s Lo 3200±800
2 4800±800
1s 3 6400±800
Hi 8000±800
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s Max. total

interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
Inst.trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
■Internal Accessories
Operating handle
AX SHT or UVT direction
mounting mounting
Reference Reference
Accessories Type name page Accessories Type name page
Operating handle 70
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-16SW3 (*1) 69 Electrical operation device 61
105
Front connection Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1600-SEW.
Conductor thickness t=6 × W75 max.

Insulating barrier 60 20 35
(removable) ø11
38
4-pole
38 15
Bolt M10 × 65
(185.5)
(185.5)
3-pole Breaker
Auxiliary handle Breaker
(removable)
210 Mounting hole 280 18.5
R11.5
406
346
375
97
ø17.5
ø9.5
115
130
M8 tap or ø10
20 49.5 70 70 80
101.5 133.5
203
304.5 1.0mm clearance on each side
263 17 140
364.5 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
190
280
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
Rear connection Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1600-SEW.
Connection allowance 15 38 15
38
60
106 106
18
318
212
ø11 Breaker Mounting angle

Mounting angle Conductor thickness Mounting angle M10 × 50 bolt
t=6 × W75 max. Conductor thickness
t=6 × W75 max.
20
20
175 min. 160 min.

109
109
375
233
233
15
36
60
38
140 ø11 70 70
38 15 M10 × 50 bolt
38 M8 tap or ø10
Stud can be rotated 90˚ 15
Stud is in horizontal direction.
125 140 125
Stud can not be rotated 90˚
140 200 3-pole 4-pole
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
6
Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF1600-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.
106
NV30-CS Type name NV30-CS

Number of poles 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100–230 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (A) 5 10 15 20 30
High-speed Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30
type Max.operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) —
Time-delay
Max.operating time at 2I∆n (s) —
type
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) —
Earth-leakage indication system Button
Rated short-circuit 440V —
breaking capacity (kA) —
AC 400V
IEC 60947-2
Icu/Ics 230V 2.5/2
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M4 × 0.7 × 20 (2pcs.)
Type NV30-CS
■Operating Characteristics ■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics

3h
2h
4h
1h
High-
2h
speed
40min 1h
type
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity

Type NV30-CS 30min
20min
10min
10min 4min
6min 2min
1min
4min
Operating time
30s
2min
10s
5s
1min
Operating time
40s 2s
30s Max. 1s
20s 0.5s
10s 0.2s
0.1s
6s
4s 0.04s
0.02s
2s 0.01s
1s 25 50 100 500 1000
0.6s Ground-fault current

0.4s Min. (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100

Operating time change rate (%)
Operating handle AL AX 300

Rated ambient
250
MG 200
150
100
80
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be produced
upon request. Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories ■Internal Wiring Diagram

Reference Reference Test button
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
page page
Terminal cover
Lock cover (LC) LC03CS 70 Small (TC-S) TCS-03CS3W

Rail mounting adapter DIN-03CS 70 Large (TC-L) TCL-03CS3W ZCT
Load side
60
Line side
Handle lock device HL-05FH 70 Rear (BTC) BTC-03CS

Skeleton (TTC) TTC-03CS
Magnetic Senstivity
device selector
Leakage
indication button
107
Front connection
67.5
Mtg. hole M5 screw 14.5 Breaker
Applicable
Test button
wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2
76.5
84
64
54
50
96
ø8.5
10 ø5.5
ø5
6
Leakage 28 12.5 (max) M4 ✕ 0.7
23.5 23.5
indicator button taps or ø5
49
Bus t max. =3
52
Bus drilling for Drilling plan
4 55 direct connection
67
Rear connection
M4 ✕ 0.7 taps
or ø5 Breaker
Mtg plate t max =3.2 Breaker
R1
45 (min)
25 (min)
76.5
76.5
84
52
5
38.5
58.5
23.5 ø14 65
55 47
Insulating tube
8
Front-plate cutout
M6 screw Breaker mtg
M4 ✕ 0.7 screw Drilling plan
108
NV32-SW NV63-CW Type name NV32-SW NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW

(5) 6 10 (5) (10) (15) 16 (5) (10) (15) 16 (15) 16 20 25
NV63-SW NV63-HW Rated current In (Amp.) (15) 16 20 20 25 (30) 32 20 25 (30) 32 (30) 32 40 50
25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 40 50 (60) 63 (60) 63
100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500 30,100 • 200 • 500 30,100 • 200 • 500 30,100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 5/2 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5

breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) 10/5 7.5/4 15/8 25/13
AC230V
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs) excluding models of NV63-CW
Type NV63-SW

4h
2h 4h
High-
1h Types 2h
speed
NV32-SW 1h
30min type

NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW 30min
20min
14min 10min
10min
6min 4min
4min
2min
2min 1min
Operating time
Max. 30s
Operating time
1min
30s 10s
20s 5s
10s 2s
1s
5s
0.5s
2s 0.2s
Min.
1s 0.1s
0.5s 0.04s
0.02s
0.2s 0.01s
0.1s
25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
Ground-fault current
0.02s (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Operating handle
Left-side Right-side 300
Rated ambient
250
mounting mounting
200
AL AX UVT
150
MG EAL 100
80
70
Lead wire
TBM
Remark: (1) refer to page 44. direction –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Test button
page page
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
S S05SW 57 interlock ZCT
Load side
Operating handle
Line side
V V05SWF 54 Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W

Terminal cover
R — — Large TC-L TCL-05SW3W

LC LC-05SW Skeleton TTC TTC-05SW3 60
HLF-05SW Rear BTC BTC-05SW3W
(*1) 70
Handle lock device Magnetic Senstivity
HL HLN-05SW Plug-in PTC PTC-05SW3W device selector
HL-S HLS-05SW
IEC 35mm rail DIN-05SW 70
mounting adapters
Leakage
Note: (*1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
109
Front connection
M5×0.8 screw Applicable

Insulation barrier (M6 for 63A) wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2
(removable)
Mounting hole Sensitivity current

selector 24 Breaker
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 63A)
111
111
130
50
84
φ4.5
φ8.5
6
22 Leakage
Trip button 45 25 M4×0.7 taps
indicaton button
12.5 max. or 5mm dia.hole
50 Test button 61
68 t=5 max.)
75
4 72 Conductor drilling
Drilling plan
90
Rear connection
Mounting panel Breaker

t=3.2max Breaker
Insulation tube
111
1
R
52
8
111
φ14
70
M4×0.7 screw
50 for mounting breaker 25
M4×0.7 taps
27 min.
M6 screw 1.0mm clearance on each side of
50
or 5mm-dia.hole
the handle frame.
68
72 42
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
M5×0.8
terminal block mounting screw
80
Mounting panel 50
3
54
15.5
11
83.5
Center line of
111
180
80
54
5.5 breaker body

85
16.5 max.
54
7
25
21 M6 screw 6mm-dia.hole or
M5×0.8 taps
10 89 30 φ6.5 82
Conductor drilling cutout

Details of terminal for direct connection
Cutout and drilling plan
Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
110
NV125-CW NV125-SW Type name NV125-CW NV125-SW

(15) 16 20 (30)
NV125-HW
(15) 16 20 (30)
63 (75) 80
NV125-HW Rated current In (Amp.)
100 125
32 40 50 (60) 63
(75) 80 100 (125)*1
32 40 50 (60)
63 (75) 80 100
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4
100–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (2) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500 30,100 • 200 • 500 30,100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 10/5 25/13 50/25
breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 10/5 30/15 50/25
AC230V 30/15 50/25 100/50
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
excluding models of NV125-CW
*1: 3P only
Notes: (1) The time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
Type NV125-SW (2) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
4h 4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h 2h
Types
1h NV125-CW 63A~100A 1h Types 1h Types 1h Types
NV125-SW 40A~100A NV125-SW 16A~20A NV125-CW 125A NV125-SW 32A
30min NV125-HW 40A~100A 30min 30min 30min
NV125-HW 16A~20A NV125-SW 125A NV125-HW 32A
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A)
Operating time
Operating time
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
2min 2min 2min 2min
Max. (40A~50A) Max.
1min 1min 1min 1min
Max.
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. Min.
Min.
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s Max. total
breaking 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s
Max. total 0.05s time Max. total Max. total
breaking time 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
■Earth-Leakage Tripping ■Internal Accessories ■Temperature Characteristics

Characteristics Operating handle
4h 130
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
2h High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type

1h
speed 0.45s(MAX) 1s(MAX) 2s(MAX) mounting mounting 120
type
30min
AL AX
10min UVT
110

Operating time
Lead wire
4min
MG EAL TBM
2min
1min direction 100

30s
10s 90
5s
2s 80
1s –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Inertial
0.5s nonoperating time
Inertial
0.1s
Inertial
0.02s Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
0.01s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
■External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram

Accessories Type name Reference Accessories Type name Reference Test button
page page
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*4) 69
Operating S S1SW 57 interlock
ZCT
Line side
Load side
handle V V1SW (*1) 54 Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*4)

Terminal cover

LC LC-1SW Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3(*4) 60
Handle lock (*2) HLF-1SW Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*4) Magnetic Senstivity
70
device HL HLN-1SW Plug-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*4) device selector
HL-S HLS-1SW IEC 35mm rail

DIN-1SW (*4) 70
mounting adapters
Electrical
MDS-NV1SWE (*3) 61 Leakage
operation device
indication button
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type. Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
111
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) Solderless terminal
for wire size
Mounting hole C
L 14~2/0AWG CU/AL
M8 screw Breaker
24
C
L C C
50
Sensitivity current Sensitivity current L L

selector selector
Operating time Operating time
selector selector
(*1) 110-111
C
L (time-delay type) (time-delay type) C
L
130
112
50
84
Leakage Leakage Wire connection
indication button indication button
Test button Test button
ø8.5
Trip 22 Trip 30 45 30 30
button Neutral pole
button
8
60 90 61 M4× 0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia. hole
68
90 120
19 max.
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
90
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
Mounting base Breaker
3-pole 3-pole C
L
102 C
L C
L
Mounting plate Breaker
52 Stud rotatable C
L
t=3.2 max.
by 90°
(*1) 110-111
C
L 112
Connection C
L 1
R
52
8
C allowance
112
L
15
16
30
28
30 φ18 30
8.5
5 M4× 0.7 86
60 90
M8 bolt breaker
2.5 60 mounting screw
M4× 0.7 taps or
15 2.5 90 5mm-dia. hole
Insulation
68 54.5 15 tube 1.0mm clearance on each side
3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
72 104.5
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
4-pole
M5× 0.8
Terminal block mounting screw 125
90 Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

Mounting plate
30 C
L C
L
56
11
C
L C
L
54
94
5.5 20
190
134
98
16.5 max.
12
56
21 60
30 60
φ8.5
12.5 95
M8 screw
89 30 97 127
Conductor drilling
Details of terminal 3-pole for direct connection
6mm-dia. hole
3-pole 4-pole or M5× 0.8 taps
Drilling plan
Remarks: (1) NV125-CW is available in 3-pole only.
(2) In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
112
NV250-CW NV250-SW Type name NV250-CW NV250-SW NV250-HW
125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
NV250-HW Rated current In (Amp.)
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 200 225
100–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1)
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30, 100 • 200 • 500 30, 100 • 200 • 500 30, 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 15/8 25/13 50/13
breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 18/9 30/15 50/13
AC230V 35/18 50/25 100/25
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type NV250-SW Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.

4h 4h
High-
2h Types 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
speed
1h NV250-CW 1h 0.45s(MAX) 1s(MAX) 2s(MAX)
type
30min NV250-SW 30min

20min NV250-HW
14min

10min

10min

6min 4min

4min

2min
2min
Operating time
Max.
Operating time
1min
1min
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
5s
2s
Min.
2s 1s
1s Inertial
0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
0.5s 250A 0.2s nonoperating time
0.2s 125~ Max.total 0.1s
225A breaking time Inertial
0.1s
0.05s 0.02s
0.02s 0.01s
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
×100% of rated current Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

Operating handle
Rated ambient
130
Left-side Right-side AL AX
Curreny rating (%)
mounting mounting UVT 120

Lead wire
MG EAL TBM direction 110
100
90
(*1)
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (*1) refer to page 44.

page page
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*3) 69
S S2SW 57 interlock
Operating
ZCT
Line side
handle
Load side

Terminal cover

Handle lock (*2) HLF-2SW Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*3)
70
device HL HLN-2SW Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*3) Magnetic Senstivity
device selector
HL-S HLS-2SW
Electrical
MDS-NV2SWE (*4) 61
operation device
Leakage
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
indication button
(*4) Specify the working voltage. Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
(*5) NV250-HW model cannot be produced.
113
Front connection
30
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier M8 bolt
24
(removable) (Hex-soket)
Trip button C
L Breaker
Solderless terminal
100
C
L for wire size C
L C
L
Sensitivity 2
selector 125~175A 14~95mm
200~250A 70~125mm2
Wire connection
Operating time
C
L C
L
126
144
165
102
selector
50
(for time-delay
φ4.5
type)
φ8.5
Leakage
100
45
indication
φ8.5
35 35
10
button
61
22 35 M4×0.7 screw
Neutral or φ5
Test button
pole 68
70 105 23 max.
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
105 140 (Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection Drilling plan
92
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
Stud can be 4-pole 3-pole
Mounting plate rotated 90° Breaker C
L Breaker
t max.=3.2 3-pole C
L C
L
C
L
Connection
8
C
L C
L
144
1
allowance L
126
144
52
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 35 32.5
15 6 mounting screw ø24
35 35
15 100
φ9 70 M4×0.7
Insulating
M8 bolt 70 screw
tube 105 1mm clearance
68 71 105 or φ5
on each side
of handle
72 106 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan Front-plate cutout

6
Plug-in

Mounting plate Breaker (Terminal block)
C
34.5
L
C
L C
L
Connection
allowance
58.5
C
L
144
C
L
54
80
200
14
22
70
6
58.5
153
28
15
M6 70 105
Terminal block φ7
18 20
mounting screw φ9 107 142
M8 bolt
Stud attachable in this
86 32 direction only 3-pole 4-pole
70 Insulating barrier
Drilling plan
Remarks: (1) NV250-CW are available in 3-pole only.

(2) In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
114
NV250-SEW NV250-HEW Type name NV250-SEW NV250-HEW
125–225 125–225
Adjustable Adjustable
100–440 100–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 25/13 50/13

breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 30/15 50/13
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) 50/25 100/25
AC230V
Type NV250-SEW Mounting screw:
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pc, 4P: 6pcs)
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.

4h 4h
Types High-
2h 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
NV250-SEW NV250-HEW speed
1h 0.45s(MAX) 1s(MAX) 2s(MAX)
1h type
Note)
30min Current setting Ir Rated current In 30min

125~225A 225A
20min (Adjustable)

14min 10min

10min
6min 4min

4min LTD operating time TL
12-60-80-100s ±20% 2min

Operating time
2min
(at 200%) 1min
1min 30s
Operating time
30s
20s 10s
10s 5s
5s pickup current IP Ir ×(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 2s
Ir ×(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 1s
-0.95-1.0) ±10% Inertial
1s 0.5s
STD operating time Ts
0.5s Pre-alarm 0.2s nonoperating time
operating time TP 0.3 ± 0.06s
TL 0.1s
0.2s TP = ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s Inertial
2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 0.04s nonoperating time
0.06 ± 0.02s 0.02s
0.05s
Max.total breaking 0.01s
INST pickup current Il time
0.02s In×(4~16) ±15%
0.01s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Current setting Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)

Operating handle AL AX UVT PAL
130
Rated ambient

Derating of Load current (%)
mounting mounting MG EAL TBM direction 120
110
100
90
(*1)
80
Remark: (*1) refer to page 44. 70

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

page page
Characteristic
F F2SW 55 Mechanical setting part
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*3) 69
S S2SW 57 interlock
Operating
handle V V2SW (*1) 54 Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*3) Magnetic
Terminal cover
device
ZCT
CT
Load side
Line side
Handle lock (*2) HLF-2SW Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*3)

70
device HL HLN-2SW Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*3) CT
HL-S HLS-2SW CT
Electrical Magnetic Sensitivity

MDS-NVE2SWE (*4) 61 selector
operation device device
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type. Leakage
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. indication button
(*5) NV250-HEW model cannot be produced.
115
Front connection
Insulating barrier M8 bolt 24 Note: The setting of selector is available by openning the upper cover.
(removable) (Hex-soket)
Leakage indicator Breaker
Mounting hole
30
button
100
Current indication LED
102 (upper cover)

OVER Solderless terminal
PAL for wire size
70%
125 175A 14 95mm2
Sensitivity selector 200 225A 70 125mm2
126
144
165
50
Operating Wire connection
Trip time selector
button (for time-delay type)
ø8.5
Test button
100
ø4.5
45 35 35
φ8.5
10
Test 22 Operating 35 Neutral 61
cover
characteristics pole M4×0.7 taps
70 selector 68 23max. or φ5
105
4 72 (Bus t max.=7) 3-pole 4-pole

105 140
Bus drilling for
92
3-pole 4-pole direct connection Drilling plan
Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
Insulating 3-pole
tube Stud can be 3-pole
t max.=3.2 rotated 90° Breaker
8
Connection
126
144
144
R1
allowance
52
22
20
M4×0.7 35
6 breaker ø24 32.5
15
mounting screw
35 35
15 φ9 70 M4×0.7
100
M8 bolt taps
Insulating 70 or φ5
68 71 105
105 tube
1mm clearance
72 106 3-pole 4-pole on each side
of handle
Drilling plan
Front-plate cutout
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal Breaker (Terminal block)

Mounting plate block
Connection
allowance
34.5
58.5
22
200
54
80
144
14
70
6
153
58.5
15
28
M6 70
20 φ7 105
18 Terminal block
mounting screw φ9 107 142
70
M8 bolt
86 32
Stud attachable in this Insulating 3-pole 4-pole

derection only barrier
Drilling plan
116
NV125-RW Type name NV125-RW
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100
Number of poles 3
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Rated short-circuit AC440V 125/125

breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 125/125
AC230V 125/125
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw : M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Type NV125-RW (Front connection) Insulation barrier : (3P:4pcs, 4P:6pcs)
Notes : (1) The Time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
(2) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
1h Type 1h Type 1h Type

NV125-RW 16A~32A 30min
NV125-RW 40A~100A 30min
NV125-RW 32A
30min
20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min

4min 4min 4min
Max.(60A~100A)
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
2min 2min 2min
Max.(40A~50A) Max.
1min 1min 1min
Max.
30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

Max. total
0.1s breaking 0.1s 0.1s
time 0.05s Max. total 0.05s Max. total
0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
■Earth-Leakage Tripping ■Internal Accessories ■Temperature Characteristics

Characteristics
4h Operating handle
High-
2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
speed Left-side Right-side 130
Rated ambient
1h 0.45s(MAX) 1s(MAX) 2s(MAX)

Current rating (%)
30min
type mounting mounting
120

10min
4min AL AX UVT 110

2min
1min Lead wire
Operating time
MG EAL TBM 100

30s direction
10s 90
5s
2s 80
1s –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Inertial
Inertial
0.2s nonoperating time Ambient temperature (°C)
0.1s
Inertial
0.02s
0.01s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 5001000 25 50 100 5001000 25 50 100 5001000

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

page page
F F1UW 55 Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*1)
Terminal cover
S S1SW 57 Large TC-L TCL-1SW3W (*1) ZCT

Line side
Load side
Operating handle
V V1UW 54 Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3 (*1) 60
R R1UW 58 Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*1)
Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SW3 (*1) 69 Plug-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*1)
Magnetic Senstivity
Electrical operation device — — LC LC-1SW device selector
Handle lock (*2) HLF-1SW

HL 70
device HLN-1SW
HL-S HLS-1SW
Leakage
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. indication button
117
Front connection
Mounting hole
Breaker
M8 screw
24
C
L
C
L
Sensitivity current
selector
61
Operating time
(*1) 171-172
selector
C C
191
L L
(time-delay type)
173
φ8.5
130
84
50
Leakage
8
indication button
Test button
30
Trip 22 45
19 max.
button
60 61
M4×7 taps or
90 68 (Conductor thickness t=5 max.) 5mm-dia. hole
4 72
Conductor drilling for direct connection
90 Drilling plan
Rear connection
Mounting plate
102 Stud rotatble
t=3.2 max. Breaker
by 90°
52
C
L C
L Breaker
4.5
C
L
(*1) 171-172
C C
L
173
L
Mounting base
R1
52
173
C
L
Connection
8
15 allowance
16
30 φ18
86
8.5
5 60
2.5 M8 bolt M4×0.7 M4×7 taps or
60 5mm-dia. hole
breaker
15 2.5 mounting screw
68 54.5 15 side of the handle frame.
Insulation
72 104.5 tube Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
M5×0.8
Terminal block mounting screw Breaker
Mounting plate
(plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in terminal C
L C
L
block
56
11
5.5 20
C
L C
L C
L
159
251
16.5 max.
195
115
155
12
56
21 60 12.5 30
φ8.5 6mm-dia. hole
89 30 M8 screw 95 97 or M5× 0.8 taps
Details of terminal Conductor drilling

Drilling plan
118
NV250-RW Type name NV250-RW
125 150 175

200 225
Number of poles 3
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Rated short-circuit AC440V 125/125

breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 125/125
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) 125/125
AC230V
Type NV250-RW Mounting screw : M4 × 0.7 × 55 (2pcs),

Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) M4 × 0.7 × 73 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier : (4pcs)
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V

4h 4h
2h High-
2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
speed 0.45s(MAX) 1s(MAX) 2s(MAX)
1h Type 1h
type
NV250-RW 30min
30min

20min
10min

14min

10min
6min 4min
4min 2min
Operating time
2min 1min
Operating time
Max.
1min 30s
30s
20s 10s
5s
10s
5s 2s
Min. 1s
2s
0.5s Inertial
1s Inertial nonoperating time
0.5s
0.1s
0.2s Inertial
Max.total 0.04s nonoperating time
0.1s breaking time
0.02s
0.05s 0.01s
0.02s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

Operating handle
Rated ambient
Left-side Right-side 130

mounting mounting
Curreny rating (%)
120
Lead wire
AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM direction 110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

page page
F F2UW 55 Mechanical
MI MI-05SW3 (*1) 69
S S2SW 57 interlock
Operating handle ZCT
Line side
Load side
V V2UW 54 Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*1)

Terminal cover
R R2UW 58 Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*1)

(*2) HLF-2SW Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*1)
Handle lock device 70 Senstivity
HL HLN-2SW Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*1) Magnetic
device selector
HL-S HLS-2SW
Electrical
operation device — —
Leakage
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. indication button
119
Front connection
M8 bolt
Insulating barrier (Hex-socket)
Mounting hole (removable)
24 Breaker
C
L
28
100
C
L
Solderless terminal
for wire size
75
Sensitivity selector
75
125~175A 14~95mm2
200~225A 70~125mm2
Operating time selector
C (for time-delay type) Wire connection C
L L
201
240
219
165
165
102
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
Leakage indication
button
10
100
45
φ8.5
Test button
35
Trip 61 23 max
22 M4×0.7 screw
Button or φ5
68
70 (Bus t max.=7) Drilling plan
4 72
Bus drilling for
105
direct connection
92
Rear connection
Insulating Breaker
Stud can be
Mounting plate tube C
L
rotated 90° Breaker
t max.=3.2 C
L
73
11.5
C
L
108 C
L
C
L C
L 1
201
219
52
R
219
Connection
allowance
22
20
100
15 6 M4×0.7 35
breaker ø24
15 70 mounting screw
φ9 70
M4×0.7 1mm clearance
M8 bolt
68 71 screw on each side
Insulating
tube or φ5 of handle
72 106
Drilling plan
Front-plate cutout
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal
Mounting plate Breaker (Terminal block)
block
34.5
C
L
C
L
Connection
58.5
22 allowance
C
L C
L
129
155
275
219
15
14
70
153
6
58.5
28
20 φ9
70 φ7
18 M8 bolt
M6
Terminal block 70 107
86 32 Insulating
mounting screw Stud attachable in this barrier
direction only
Drilling plan
120
NV400-CW Type name NV400-CW NV400-SW

Number of poles 3
NV400-SW Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (Amp.) 250 300 350 400
High-speed Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
type Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
Time-delay
type Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Rated short-circuit 440V 25/13 42/42
IEC60947-2 AC 400V 36/18 45/45
(lcu/lcs) 230V 50/25 85/85
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
Type NV400-SW (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (4pcs)

4h
2h
Types 4h
1h
NV400-CW High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
NV400-SW speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
30min 1h
type


20min 30min
14min
10min 10min
6min 4min
4min 2min
2min 1min
Operating time
30s
1min
Operating time
Max. 10s
30s 5s
20s
2s
10s 1s
NV400-CW Inertial
5s 0.5s
Min. 0.2s
nonoperating time
2s 0.1s
Inertial
1s 0.04s
nonoperating time
NV400-SW 0.02s
0.5s 0.01s
0.2s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
0.1s (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Max. total breaking time
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (×100% of rated current)

Operating handle
Lead wire 130
Left-side Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM
direction Reference ambient
Current rating (%)
mounting mounting 120 temperature

110
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) refer to page 46 and 47.

page page
Terminal cover
F F4SWNV 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3

ZCT
Operating handle S S4CW, S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-4SW3 60
Line side
Load side
V V4SWNV,V4SWFNV 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3

Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1) 69 Handle HL HL-4CW, HL-4SW
70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4CW, HT-4SW 70 lock device HL-S HLS-4SW
Magnetic Sensitivity
Electrical operation device 61 device selector
Leakage indication button

121
Front connection

28 44 Breaker
8 CL
Conductor thickness
16
110
t=8 max.
CL Breaker
43
39
Sensitivity current selector
R6
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
92
CL
102
257
194
CL
12
CL
Leakage indication button 47
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button Test button
25
39
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44 M6 tap or ø7 118
44 Conductor drilling for direct connection
ø14 97
M12 bolt 103 1.0mm clearance on each
51 5 107 side of the handle frame.
112
140
155(NV400-SP) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134(NV400-CP)

Line side
Breaker
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°C Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent 6-ø35
C
L
8
24 24
8
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 ø35 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13 M12 bolt Add these tapped holes in
113 87 87 44
Insulation tube 8 positions to standard boring.
87
Drilling plan Load side

6
Plug-in

C
L Breaker
C
L
35
55
M8 terminal block
280
225
163
135
CL mounting screw Connection allowance C

L
24
24
8
79
55
160
28
ø10
15
18 28 Stud attachable in 44
this direction only
121 136
87
Insulating barrier
ø13 M12 bolt
Drilling plan
122
NV400-SEW Type name NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW

NV400-HEW Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
NV400-REW Rated current In (Amp.) 200-400 adjustable
Time-delay
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Rated short-circuit 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
AC 400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
Type NV400-SEW (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

10h
4h
5h Types High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
NV400-SEW speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
1h
2h NV400-HEW type


NV400-REW 30min
1h
10min
LTD operating time Current setting Rated current
30min
at 125% Ir: 200-400A In: 400A 4min
20min
1000s (TL=150s set) (Adjustable) 2min
14min
10min 670s (TL=100s set)
1min
Operating time
6min 400s (TL= 60s set)

30s
4min 80s (TL= 12s set)
10s
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
5s
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
2s
30s 1s
20s 0.5s Inertial
10s 0.2s
Pre-alarm nonoperating time
STD pickup current Is 0.1s
5s pickup current Ip Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4- Inertial
Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.8- 5-6-7-8-10) ±15% 0.04s
0.85-0.9-0.95
nonoperating time
2s 0.02s
-1.0) ±10%
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts
0.5s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
operating time Tp
TL 0.3 ± 0.06 s Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
Tp= ±20% (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04 s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03 s
0.06 ± 0.02 s
0.05s
0.02s INST pickup current II

x 4 ~ x16 ±15% Max. total
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current setting (% to Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current (% to In)

Operating handle Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM 130
Rated ambient
Left-side Right-side direction

mounting mounting PAL TI 120
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached. Ambient temperature (°C)
(2) refer to page 46 and 47.

Reference Reference Characteristic Test button
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name setting part
page page
Terminal cover
F F4SWNV 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1) (*2) Magnetic

device
V V4SWNV,V4SWFNV 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1) (*2) ZCT In case of 4P
N
70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70 lock device HL-S HLS-4SW CT
Line side
Load side
Electrical operation CT
61
device
CT
Note: (*1) This is for NV400-SEW. Magnetic Sensitivity
(*2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. device selector

123 Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
Front connection
94.5 4-pole
CL 3-pole
28 44
t=8 max. Breaker
16
CL
110
CL Breaker CL
43
Sensitivity current
selector
39
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
R6
257
102
194
92
CL
12
Leakage indication CL CL
59
ø12.5
button
ø7
Trip button Test button
25
39
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Neutral pole Conductor drilling for direct connection 44 M6 tap or ø7 44
44 118
ø14 97
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each
112 185 side of the handle frame.
155
140 196 3-pole 4-pole
Front-panel cutout

4-pole Line side

Stud can be Breaker Groove for reducing
rotated 90°C C heat by overcurrent C 6-ø35
L L 8
24 24
8
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 11 11
44 ø35
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped holes in
113 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
M12 bolt 8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 87
130.5

Drilling plan

6
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 3-pole C
L Breaker C
L
C
L
35
55
Connection
M8 terminal block
280
225
163
135
CL allowance C
L
24 mounting screw
24
8
79
55
160
28
ø10
15
18 28 Stud attachable
44 87
in this direction only
121 136 181
ø13 87
Insulating barrier
M12 bolt
130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
124
NV630-CW Type name NV630-CW NV630-SW

Number of poles 3
NV630-SW Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
High-speed Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Time-delay
type Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
AC 400V 36/18 50/50
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 230V 50/25 85/85
Type NV630-SW (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (4pcs)

4h
2h
1h Types 4h
NV630-CW NV630-SW High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
30min speed
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
20min type


14min 30min
10min
10min
6min
4min 4min
2min
2min
1min
Operating time
1min 30s
Max.
30s 10s
5s
Operating time
20s
2s
10s
1s
5s
0.5s Inertial
Min. Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
2s nonoperating time
0.1s
1s Inertial
0.04s
nonoperating time
0.5s 0.02s
0.01s
0.2s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.1s Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
Max. total breaking time (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current

Operating handle 130
Current rating (%)
AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM direction 120 Reference ambient

mounting mounting
temperature
110
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) refer to page 46 and 47.

External Accessories (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Test button
page page
Terminal cover
F F4SWWNV 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3

ZCT
Line side
Operating handle S S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-4SW3 60

Load side
V V4SW, V4SWF 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3

Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 69 Handle HL HL-4SW
70
Magnetic Sensitivity
Electrical operation device 61 device selector

125
Front connection
94.5
28 44
4-pole
Insulating barrier Bus t max.=10 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Sensitivity Breaker
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
R6
Leakage-indicator 59 ø10.5
92
button
Trip 30
ø7
button Test button
39
Bus t max.=10
ø12.5
Bus drilling for 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral direct connection or ø7
Pole 44
97 118
ø14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole

Mounting Stud can be 4-pole Eddy-current Line side

plate rotated 90° Breaker heat-reducing slit
3-pole
6-ø35
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or ø7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
6
Drilling plan

Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal Mounting plate 3-pole
block Breaker
35
55
M8 Connection
280
225
135
163
terminal block allowance

25 Mounting screw
25
10
93
55
160
28
ø10
20
18 30 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 ø13 110 136 181
M12 bolt
165.5 Insulating barrier
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Note: NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-HEW is only the pole of 3.
126
NV630-SEW Type name NV630-SEW NV630-HEW

Number of poles 3 4 3
NV630-HEW Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (Amp.) 300-630 adjustable
Time-delay
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
AC 400V 50/50 70/70
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 230V 85/85 100/100
Type NV630-SEW (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Notes: (*1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.

10h
5h 4h
Types High-
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
2h 1h
type


Current setting Rated Current 30min
1h Ir:300~630A In:630A
LTD operating time (Adjustable) 10min
30min at-125%
20min 1000s(TL=150s set) 4min
14min 2min
570s(TL=100s set)
10min
400s(TL= 60s set) 1min
Operating time
6min
80s(TL= 12s set) 30s
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20% 10s
(at 200%) 5s
1min
Operating time
2s
30s 1s
20s 0.5s Inertial
10s 0.2s
nonoperating time
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Isd 0.1s
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 Inertial
Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% 0.04s
nonoperating time
2s -0.9-0.95-1.0)±10% 0.02s
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
TL
±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
0.02s In x(4~15) ±15%
Max.total
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% to Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In)

Operating handle Lead wire 130
AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM
Rated ambient
Left-side Right-side direction

mounting mounting PAL TI 120
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
(2) refer to page 46 and 47.

Reference Reference Characteristic Test button
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name setting part
page page
Terminal cover
F F4SWNV 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1) Magnetic

device
V V4SWF, V4SW 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1) ZCT In case of 4P
N
70
lock device
Load side
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70 HL-S HLS-4SW CT

Line side
Electrical operation CT
61
device
CT
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. Magnetic Sensitivity
device selector
127 Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

Front connection
94.5
28 44
4-pole
Insulating barrier Bus t max.=10 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Sensitivity Breaker
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
R6
Leakage-indicator 59 ø10.5
92
button
Trip 30
ø7
button Test button
39
Bus t max.=10
ø12.5
Bus drilling for 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral direct connection or ø7
Pole 44
97 118
ø14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole

Mounting Stud can be 4-pole Eddy-current Line side

plate rotated 90° Breaker heat-reducing slit
3-pole
6-ø35
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or ø7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
6
Drilling plan

Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal Mounting plate 3-pole
block Breaker
35
55
M8 Connection
280
225
135
163
terminal block allowance

25 Mounting screw
25
10
93
55
160
28
ø10
20
18 30 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 ø13 110 136 181
M12 bolt
165.5 Insulating barrier
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Note: NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-HEW is only the pole of 3.
128
NV800-SEW Type name NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

Number of poles 3
NV800-HEW Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (Amp.) 400-800 adjustable
High-speed Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
type Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) (0.04)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Time-delay
type Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
AC 400V 50/50 70/70
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 230V 85/85 100/100
Type NV800-SEW (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2pcs)

10h
5h 4h
Types High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
2h NV800-SEW NV800-HEW speed
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
type


1h 30min
LTD operating time Ir:400~800A In:800A
30min 10min
at-125% (Adjustable)
20min
4min
10min 670s(TL=100s set) 2min
6min 400s(TL= 60s set) 1min
Operating time
80s(TL= 12s set) 30s

4min
2min 12 – 60 – 100 – 150s ±20% 10s
(at 200%) 5s
1min
Operating time
2s
30s
1s
20s Inertial
0.5s
10s Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
STD pickup current Isd
nonoperating time
5s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip 0.1s
Ir × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4
Inertial
Ir × (0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15% 0.04s
nonoperating time
2s – 0.9 – 0.95 – 1.0) ±10% 0.02s
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp
0.5s TL STD operating time Ts 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Tp= ±20%
2
0.3 ± 0.06s
(at 200%) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s

0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
INST Pickup current Ii
0.02s In x(4~10) ±15% Max.total
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% to Ir)
■Current reducing curve
Working current correcting ratio (%)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In)

130
■Internal Accessories 120
Operating handle Lead wire 110 Reference ambient temperature

AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM
Left-side Right-side direction 100
mounting mounting PAL TI
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■Internal Wiring Diagram

Test button
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
(2) refer to page 46 and 47. Characteristic
setting part
■External Accessories Magnetic

device
ZCT
Accessories Type name
Line side
page page
Load side
CT
Terminal cover
F F8SWNV 55 Large (TC-L) TCL-8SW3 CT

Operating handle S S4SW 57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-8SW3 60
CT
V V8SWF, V8SW 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-8SW3 Magnetic Sensitivity
device selector
Handle HL HL-4SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-8SW3 69 70
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW 70 Electrical operation device 61 Leakage indication button
129
Front connection
26
Mounting hole 46 Breaker
Breaker
Conductor thickness
110
t=12 max.
87
32
8 R6
Sensitivity current selector Terminal dimension for directly
connecting conductor
92
243
(Time-delay type)
275
102
15
32
Leakage indication button ø8.5
ø8
12
172
32 8
M6 tap or ø7
ø14
8 70
87
46 22
Test button
15
51
97 40
14 1.0mm clearance on each
103 side of the handle frame.
40
Trip button 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
140 Conductor drilling for direct connection Front-panel cutout
155 Drilling plan
210

Connection
allowance 6-ø48
M6 tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
5
25
24 24
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
10
5
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
10
243
243
295
12.5
24 24
13
45
11 11 8-M4 screw
10 8 Add these tapped holes in
M6 screw for 70
8 32 15 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
140 mounting breaker
ø13 140
113 110 M12 bolt 140
Drilling plan

6
Plug-in

56
155
187
20
301
243
13
56
10
112
32
25
70
15
23 ø10
40
M8 terminal block mounting screw 208
126 ø13
140
M12 bolt
Drilling plan
130
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF50-SWU Type name NF50-SWU
Rated current In (Amp.) (3) 5 10 15 20

30 40 50
Number of poles 2 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 240

UL489
Rated short-circuit
AC 240V 14
500V 7.5/4
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2 440V 7.5/4
(Icu/Ics) AC
400V 7.5/4
230V 15/8
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs)
Type NF50-SWU
4h
2h
1h Type
NF50-SWU
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Max.
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL AX Lead wire
SHT or UVT 300
Rated ambient
250
200
150
2-pole
100
80
70
3-pole
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
F05SWU2P
F Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
F05SWU
Operating handle
S S05SWU
Terminal
V V05SWUF (*1) Large TC-L TCL-05SWU2
cover TCL-05SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-05SWU
Note: (*1) Adjustable types can be produced upon request.
131
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable)
φ5.5
C
L C
L
24
M5×0.8 screw
6
(M6 for 63A)
Mounting hole
50
12.5 max.
t=5 max.)
C
L
84
50
150
111
Conductor drilling
φ8.5
φ4.5
Trip button
45
50 61
25 22 68
4 72
50 50
90
75
2-pole 3-pole
M4×0.7 taps or 5mm dia.hole
Breaker
C
L C
L CL CL Breaker
1
R
52
C CL
111
25 50 70
2-pole 3-pole 3-pole

2-pole
6
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.
132
NF100-CWU Type name NF100-CWU NF100-SWU
NF100-SWU Rated current In (Amp.)

at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
50 60
15 20 30 40
50 60
75 100
75 100
Rated voltage (AC V) 240 480Y/277
Rated short-circuit breaking

UL 489 480Y/277V – 22
AC
240V 10 35
capacities (kA)
690V – 8/4
IEC 60947-2 500V 7.5/4 18/9

JIS C 8201-2 AC 440V 10/5 25/13
(Icu/Ics)
400V 10/5 30/15
230V 30/15 50/25
DC 250V 7.5/4 15/8
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Type NF100-SWU
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Types 1h Type
NF100-CWU 50A~100A
30min NF100-SWU 40A~100A 30min NF100-SWU 15A~30A
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A)
2min 2min
Max. (40A,50A)
1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min.
Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70
×100% of Rated current ×100% of rated current

Operating handle
130
Rated ambient
AL AX SHT or UVT
120
Current rating (%)
110
2-pole
100
90
3-pole
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
F1SWU2P
F Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
F1SWU
Operating handle
S S1SWU
V V1SWU (*1) Terminal TCL-1SWU2
Large TC-L
cover TCL-1SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-1SWU
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
133
Front connection (Standard)
Insulation barrier
C
L
(removable)
φ8.5
Mounting M8 screw
50
hole 24
C
L
8
19 max.
C
L C
L
150
112
50
84
t=5 max)
Conductor drilling
Trip
45
button
50
61
22
68
30
60
4 72
60 90 90
2-pole 3-pole
Front connection (Solderless terminal) (Option)
Solderless terminal
C
L C
L
3
5.0
C
L C
L
Hexagon socket set screw
wire size
14~1/0AWG CU/AL
2-pole 3-pole
2-pole 3-pole 62
C
L C
L Breaker C
L C
L Breaker 30
30
1 (Insulation plate)
R
110-111
C
L C
L C
L C
L
52
(Line)
CAUTION:
When mounted in steel or cast box
cover must be insulated as shown.
M4×0.7 taps or 30mm air gap to cover or
57 86 0.8mm fibre insulating plate
5mm-dia. hole
30 extending 12.7mm out from
1.0mm clearance on each each side of breaker.
side of the handle frame.
2-pole 3-pole
134
NF225-CWU Type name NF225-CWU

at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C) 200 225
Number of poles 3

Rated voltage (AC V) 240
UL 489
AC 240V 35
capacities (kA)
500V 10/5
IEC 60947-2
440V 15/8
JIS C 8201-2 AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 18/9
230V 35/18
DC 250V 10/5 (*1)
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Terminal cover: (1 set), (*2)
Notes: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can
Type NF225-CWU be used for up to 400 V DC.
(*2) The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger
protection) structure.
4h
2h
1h Type
30min NF225-CWU
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Max.
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
Max. total
0.2s
breaking
0.1s time
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Rated ambient
130
Operating handle
Curreny rating (%)
Left-side Right-side Lead wire 120

AL AX SHT or UVT
110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

F F2SWU
Mechanical interlock Ml MI-05SWU3
Operating handle S S2SWU
V V2SWU (*1) Terminal
Large TC-L TCL-2SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-2SWU cover
135
Front connection
Insulating barrier
24
C
L
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
Mounting hole
100
C
L
102
144
165
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
Trip button
100
22 45
70 61
105 68
4 72
92
C
L Breaker C
L Breaker
φ8.5
1
R
C
L C
L
126
52
10
22 max.
Bus t max.=7
35 M4×0.7 screw 100

or φ5
Bus drilling for
direct connection
Drilling plan Front cover cutout

1mm clearance on
each side of handle
6
136
NF-SFW Type name NF-SFW

15 20 30 40
NF-SJW NF-HJW
NF-SJW Rated current In (Amp.)

at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
50 60 70 80
90 100 110
(125) (150) 175
200 225 250
125 150 175
200 225 250
NF-HJW Number of poles
125 150
3 3 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347

600Y/347V 14 14 18
UL 489
AC 480V 35 35 50
capacities (kA)
240V 65 65 100
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690
690V 8/8 8/8 15/15
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30 30/30 36/36
JIS C 8201-2 440V 36/36 36/36 50/50
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/36 36/36 50/50
230V 85/85 85/85 100/100
DC 250V (*1) 20/20 20/20 20/20
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Note: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can be used for up to 500 V DC.
Type NF-SFW
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Type Type Type
1h 1h 1h
NF-SFW NF-SFW NF-SJW/HJW
30min 15A~40A 30min 50A~150A 30min 125A~250A
20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
Max. Instantaneous trip
6min 6min Max.(60A~150A) 6min adjustment range
4min 4min 4min Position AC
Max.(40A) Max.(50A) of notch x In (%)
2min 2min 2min 4 400±80
6 600
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min 8 800
Max.(15A~30A)
30s 30s 30s 10 1000±200
20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
Min.
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
(60A~150A)
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
(50A)
Adjustable range
Max. total Max. total Max. total
0.2s breaking 0.2s breaking 0.2s breaking
time time time
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
AL AX
Lead wire
SHT or UVT direction 110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: The reference ambient temperature for IEC

models is 30°C.
F F2GSWU
Operating Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
handle S S2GSWU
V V2GSWU (*1)
Terminal
Handle Large TC-L TCL-2GSWU3
HL HLF-2GSWU cover
lock device
137
Front connection (Standard)
Insulating barrier
(removable) Hex.socket head 24
CAUTION:
M8 bolt
C
L Insulating barriers must be used
Mounting hole with uninsulated bus bars or
50
climp on terminals.
φ8.5
144
185
112
50
C
L
φ4.5
10
24 max.
ø8.5
22
50
Trip button (Conductor thickness t=7max.)
63
79 Bus bar drilling for

22 83 direct connection
35 4 86 4-FRONT
70 90
105 110
Front connection (Solderless terminal) (Option)
Mounting hole C
L
6.1
112
144
185
50
C
L
Wire size
14AWG-250MCM CU/AL
ø8.5
φ4.5
63
Trip button
83
22 86
35 4 90
70 110
3-FRONT
105
C
L C
L
CAUTION:
Breaker Breaker When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
R1 26mm air gap to cover or extending 12.7mm
out fromeach side of breaker.
C C 62
126
52
L L
27
26
1.0mm clearance
on each side of
the handle frame.
35 M4×0.7 taps or 100
Insulation plate
5mm-dia. hole
(Line)
5-RIGHT
Outline and dimensions (mm (inch))

Type NF-SFW,NF-SJW,NF-HJW
138
NF-SKW Type name NF-SKW
Rated current In (Amp.) 250 300

at ambient temperature 40°C 350 400
Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 600Y/347

600Y/347V 20
UL 489
AC 480V 35
capacities (kA)
240V 65
690V 10/10 (5/5) (*1)
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30 (25/25) (*1)
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42 (36/36) (*1)
400V 45/45 (36/36) (*1)
230V 85/85 (65/65) (*1)
Notes: (*1) In case of solderless ter minal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/).
Type NF-SKW
4h
2h
1h Type
NF-SKW
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Operating time
1min
Max.
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s Max.total
interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
600
% of rated current

Rated ambient
Current rating (%)

SHT or UVT 120
NF-SKW 110
100
90
(*1) (rated ambient 40°C) 80

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(*1)
(*1) (*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
F F4SKW Ter minal
Large TC-L TCL-4SKW
Operating handle S S4SKW cover
V V4SKW (*1)
Handle lock device HL HL-4SP
139
Front connection (Solderless terminal)
250~400A
Solderless terminal Tightening torque
275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
Mounting
8
hole
225
UL
257
102
47
Ampere ratings Wire size
250A, 300A 250-350MCM CU
φ12.5
φ7
Trip 250A 350MCM AL
button
350A, 400A 3/0AWG CU ONLY
IEC
87 97
Wire size (IEC 60228)
103 Ampere ratings
140 Class 2 Class 5
(max.141) 5 107 250A~350A 70~185mm2 95~185mm2
155 400A 150~240mm2 150~185mm2
Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×60 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Front connection (Busbar terminal)
Insulating barrier
(removable)
46
26 Bus t max. 10
t10
13
110
44
Mounting
hole
102
257
47
φ12.5
φ7
Trip
button
φ13 10
46
6
97
112
103
140
(max.141) 5 107
155
Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.
Mounting screw:M6×60 (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
R6
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out

from each side of breaker.
194
92
97
30
58
1mm clearance on
44 7dia. holes 118 each side of handle. Insulating plate
or M6 taps
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout (Line)
140
NF-SLW Type name NF-SLW

at ambient temperature 40°C 500 600
Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 600Y/347

600Y/347V 20
UL 489
AC 480V 35
capacities (kA)
240V 85
690V 10/10
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42
400V 45/45
230V 85/85
Type NF-SLW
4h
2h
1h Type
NF-SLW
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps)
2min Control Inst. trip

setting current (%)
Operating time
Max.
1min Lo 400±100
2 600
30s
3 800
20s
Hi 1000±200
10s
5s
Adjustable range
Min. of inst. pick up
2s current
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s Max. total
interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
600
% of rated current

Rated ambient
Current rating (%)

SHT or UVT 120
110
100
90
(*1) (*1) (rated ambient 40°C) 80

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(*1) (*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
F F6SLW Ter minal
cover Large TC-L TCL-6SLW
Operating handle S S4SKW
V V6SLW (*1)
Handle lock device HL HL-4SP
141
Front connection (Solderless terminal)
Solderless termianl Hexagon socket set screw
Mounting Tightening torque

hole 275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
243
275
102
8
15
UL
φ14
φ8
Trip
button Ampere ratings Wire size
500A, 600A 250-500MCM CU ONLY
140 97 IEC
Wire size (IEC 60228)
210 103 Ampere ratings
Class 2 Class 5
5 107 500A, 600A 95~185mm2 120~185mm2
155
Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
Mounting screw:M6×35 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Front connection (Busbar terminal)

Insulating barrier 46
(removable) Bus t max.
t12 10
110
Mounting
hole
102
275
15
φ14
Trip
φ8
button
8
6
87
14
32
10
15
40 46
140
97
φ14
210 103
5 107
Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case. 155

Mounting screw:M6×35 (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (2pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
R6
from each side of breaker.

243
92
97
30
58
1mm clearance on
Insulating plate
each side of handle.
70 7dia. holes 172
or M6 taps
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout (Line)
142
BH Type BH BH-P
BH-P Rated current (A)
70 70, 100 70, 100 70 70, 100 70, 100
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
Breaking IEC60898 AC230/400V 3 — 3 —

capacity AC400V — 3 — 3
(kA) sym. — DC125V 1 1
Type BH Type BH-P

4h
Operating Characteristics
2h Type:BH, BH-P 140
Rated Current:70, 100A
1h 135
Amb. temp.:40°C
30min 130
20min 125
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
14min
10min 120
6min 115
4min 70, 100A
110
2min 105
1min 100
95
30s
Operating time
20s 90
Max. 85
10s
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
■Outside Dimension Diagram

Plug-in terminal
•BH Mtg bracket
M5 × 0.8 screw 32 •BH-P (line side)
7.5
(line side & load side)

57.5
71.5
74
M5 x 0.8
100
113
73
95
57
95
screw
Breaker
center
25 25 25 60.5
Mtg slot
25 50 57.5
25 50 75 65.5
25 50 75 Mtg hole ø4.5
63.5
77.5
22 47 47 20.5 45.5 70.5 79
Bus t max. =4
.5
ø5
6
5.5
12
4.5
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole Bus drilling

13.5
14
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.
and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
143
BH-S Type BH-S M3 BH-S M6
Rated current (A) 5, 10, 15, 10, 15, 20, 15, 20, (25), 5, 10, 15, 10, 15, 20, 15, 20, (25),
20, (25), 30, (25), 30, 40, 30,40, 50, 20, (25), 30, (25), 30, 40, 30,40, 50,
at ambient temperature 40°C 40, 50, 60 50, 60 60 40, 50, 60 50, 60 60
AC 230/400 400 400 230/400 400 400
Rated voltage (V)
DC — 125 — — 125 —
Breaking IEC60898 AC230/400V 3 — 6 —

(kA) sym. — DC125V — 1 — — 1 —
Type BH-S

4h 140
135
2h Type:BH-S
130
Rated Current:5~60A
Rated ambient
1h 10A
Amb. temp.:40°C 125
Current rating (%)

30min 120 5A
20min 40-60A
115
14min
10min 110
6min 105
4min 15-25A
100
30A
2min 95
Max. 90
1min
85
30s
80
Operating time
20s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Min.
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Type B Type C Type D
6
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

•BH-S Mtg bracket M5 × 0.8 screw 32
(line side & load side)
100
113
73
95
57
95
25 50 Mtg hole 57.5

25 50 75 ø4.5 63.5
76
Bus t max. =4
ø5.5
5.5
12
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 13.5
Bus drilling
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.

and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
144
BH-PS Type BH-PS M3 BH-PS M9

Rated current (A) 10, 15, 20, 10, 15, 20, 15, 20, 30, 6, 10, 16, 10, 16, 20, 10, 16, 20,
30, 40, 50, 30, 40, 50, 40, 50, 60 20, (25), 32, (25), 30, 40, (25), 32, 40,
at ambient temperature 40°C 60 60 40, 50, 60 50, 60 50, 60
AC 230/400 400 400 230/400 400 400
Rated voltage (V)
DC — 125 — —
Breaking IEC60898 AC230/400V 3 — 9 —

(kA) sym. — DC125V — 1 — —
Type BH-PS

4h 140
135
2h Type:BH-PS
130
Rated Current:5~60A
10A
Rated ambient
1h
Amb. temp.:40°C 125
Current rating (%)

30min
6A, 30A, 32A
120
20min 50A, 60A
115
14min
10min 110
6min 105
4min 15-20A, 40A
100
2min 95
Max. 90
1min
85
30s
80
Operating time
20s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Min.
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Type B Type C Type D
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

•BH-PS Plug-in terminal
7.5
(line side)
57.5
71.5
81.5
25 25 25 60.5
25 50 75 65.5
M5 x 0.8 Mtg slot
screw 79
22 47 72
4.5
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 14
145
DIN Series
BH-D6 MCB BH-D6 (IEC60898)

Number of poles 1 2 3 4 (3+N) 2 (1+N)
Rated current (A) 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20,
at ambient temperature 30°C 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 32, 40
Rated voltage (VAC) 230/400 400 400 400 230
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898) 6
Type BH-D6
Min s Min s
200 200
10000 10000
100 Tripping Characteristics 100
Tripping Characteristics
5000 5000
Type:BH-D6 Type:BH-D6
50 50
30 2000 Rated Current:6A-63A 30 2000 Rated Current:6A-63A
20 Amb. temp.:30°C 20 Amb. temp.:30°C
1000 1000
10 500 10 500
5 5
200 200
2 2
100 100
1 1
50 50
Max.
30 Max. 30
20 20
6-10A
10 10
13-63A
5 Min. 5
Tripping time
Tripping time
Min.
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 B C 0.2
0.1 0.1 D
0.05 0.05
Max total
0.02 tripping time 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
×100% of rated current ×100% of rated current

6
■Ambient Compensating Curve ■Outside Dimension Diagram
135
•BH-D6
130 M5 screw Neutral Pole
125
N N
120
Current ratings (%)
44.5
115
ambient
Rated
110
45
87
92
105
100
95
90
N N
85
-10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 18 18 36 18
Insulation
Ambient temperature (°C) 54 Barrier(Option)
18 36 36 54
72 17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
1-pole 1+N-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
146
DIN Series
BH-DN MCB BH-DN (IEC60898)

Number of poles 2 (1+N)
Rated current (A)
6, 10, 16, 20
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898) 4.5
Type BH-DN
Min Sec
200
10000
100
5000
Type : BH-DN
50
2000 Rated current : 6A~20A
30
Amb.temp. : 30°C
20
1000
10
500
5
200
2
100
1
50
30 Max
20
10
5
Min
2
0.5
Tripping time
0.2
0.1
0.05 Max.total
tripping time
0.02
0.01
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
× Rated current
•BH-DN
M4 SCREW
8.4
18
N
45
17
70 maximum
44
Solderless Terminal
6
45
88
147
BV-D RCCB BV-D (IEC61008)
Number of poles 2 (1+N) 4 (3+N)
Rated current (A)
25, 40, 63
Rated voltage (VAC) 230 230/400
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30, 300
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆ 0.04
Rated conditional short-cirrent (kA) 6
Type BV-D
2h
1h
30min
20min
10min
Rated nonoperating current sensitivity
6min
4min
2min
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
25 50 100 500
Ground fault current

(% of rated current sensitivity) 6
•BV-D Residual
M5 screw Test button indicator Neutral pole
N
42.5
45
85
18 17 44 6
18 54
70 maximum
36 72
Solderless terminal
2-pole 4-pole
148
DIN Series
BV-DN RCBO BV-DN (IEC61009)

Number of poles 2 (1+N)
Rated current (A)
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30, 100, 300
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆n 0.04
Breaking capacity (kA) sym (IEC61009) 4.5
Type BV-DN
■Operating Characteristics ■Leakage Tripping characteristics

Min Sec
200
10000 4h
100 2h
5000
Type : BV-DN 1h
50
Rated current : 6A~32A 30min
30 2000
Amb.temp. : 30°C
20 10min
1000
10 4min
500

2min
5
Operating time
200 1min
30s
2
100
1 10s
50
5s
30 Max
20 2s
1s
10 0.5s
5 0.2s
Min 0.1s
2
0.04s
1 0.02s
0.01s
0.5
Tripping time
25 50 100 500
0.2
Ground-fault current
0.1 (% of rated current sensitivity)
Max.total
0.05 tripping time
0.02
0.01
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
× Rated current

•BV-DN M4 Screw
Test button
36
8.4
N
Residual indicator
45
17
70 maximum
44
6
45 Solderless
terminal
88
149
KB-D Isolating switch KB-D (IEC60947-3)
Number of poles 1 2 3 4 (3+N)
Utilization category AC22A class
Rated current (A)
32, 63, 80
Rated voltage (VAC) 230 400
Shot time withstand current (A) 20 × In, 1s
Shot-circuit making capacity (A) 20 × In
Type KB-D

•KB-D
M5 screw
Neutral Pole
44.5
45
87
N 92
18 36 18
Insulation
54 Barrier(Option)
18 36 54
72 17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
6
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
150
Circuit Protectors
CP30-BA Frame (A) 30

Type CP30-BA
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5
0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5,
Rated current (A)
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30
AC (V) 250
Rated voltage (V)
UL1077 DC (V) 65 125 —
CSA C22.2 No.235
AC 2.5kA at 250V
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V —
Rated short-
IEC 60934 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250
circuit EN 60934
capacity (kA) AC 2.5kA at 230V
GB 17701
JIS C 4610 DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V —
EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250
IEC 60947-2
AC 2.5/2.5kA at 230V
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics) DC 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V —
Type CP30-BA AC-DC common use —
Instantaneous type (I)
Operating characteristics Medium type (M),(MD)
Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only
Mode of tripping
Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F):hydraulic-magnetic
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S)
2h 2h 2h 2h
1h DC 1h 1h 1h
40min 40min DC 40min DC 40min DC
20min 20min AC 20min AC 20min AC

AC
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
2min 2min 2min 2min
1min 1min 1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
100 150 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 135 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 135 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 135 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
125 180 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700
Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
■Outside Dimension Diagram Medium type with inertial delay (MD) Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
2h 2h
•CP30-BA 1h
40min
1h
40min
19.5 37 54.5 33 20min 20min
Terminal cover IEC 35mm
12 1 29.5 1 47 1 10min 10min
rail 6min 6min
Terminal Terminal Terminal 4min 4min
cover cover cover 2min 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
ON ON ON
39
63
90
67
5s 5s
56
56
56
54
65
2s 2s
1s 1s
9.5
0.5s 0.5s
14
0.2s 0.2s
5.5 0.1s 0.1s
5
35
0.05s 0.05s
Mounting hole
9.5 9.5 9.5 63
ø4.5 0.02s 0.02s
Terminal cover for 65 3
17.5 17.5 17.5 0.01s 0.01s
attached terminal 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal block 125 400 700 125 400 700
block
(Ic contact)
17.5 35 52.5 Attachable on right-side only Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
17.5 17.5
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M3.5
(Plus minus self-up screw)
(The figure shows auxiliary switch.
Example: Alarms are ALa, ALb and ALc.)
AXc
AXb
AXa
AXc
AXb
AXa
AXc
AXb
AXa
Main terminal ■Temperature Characteristics
(Plus minus self-up screw)
M4·····20A max.
M5·····30A
22.5
300
Operating time variation (%)
5
250
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 200
Mounting dimension 150

Rated
ambient
100
90
80
54
70
60
12 29.5 47 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 2-M4 tap (Rated ambient 40°C)

2-M tap 2-M tap Tightening torque 1~1.4 (N-m)
151
CP-S Frame (A) 30
Type CP-S
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5
0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75
Rated current (A)
1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 7, 7.5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30
AC (V) 250 —
Rated voltage (V)
DC (V) 65 —
UL1077
AC 1.5kA at 250V —
DC 1kA at 65V —
Rated short- Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250

IEC 60934
circuit EN 60934 AC 1.5kA at 230V, 2.5kA at 120V
capacity (kA) (Icn) 1kA at 120V
DC 1kA at 60V 1kA at 60V
(1kA at 60V)
JIS C 4610 AC 1.5kA at 250V, 2.5kA at 125V
(Icn)
Type CP-S DC 1kA at 65V
1kA at 125V
1kA at 65V
(1kA at 65V)
AC-DC common use —
Instantaneous type (I)
Operating characteristics Medium type (M),(MD)
Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F),(FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only
Mode of tripping
Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F, FD):hydraulic-magnetic
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S) Medium type with inertial delay (MD)
2h 2h 2h 2h 2h
1h 1h 1h 1h 1h
40min 40min 40min 40min 40min
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
80 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
125 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700
Current Current Current Current Current
(% of instantaneous tripping current set value) (% of rated current) (% of rated current) (% of rated current) (% of rated current)
2h
Fast type with inertial delay (FD)
2h
Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
6
1h 1h
40min 40min
■Outside Dimension Diagram 20min

10min
20min
10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
•CP-S 2min 2min
Series <With auxiliary switch (AX), With series alarm switch (AL)> 1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
Switch <With switch type auxiliary switch (AX)> 20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Main terminal
Mail tab terminal nominal 250 2s 2s
(8.35W × 0.8L) 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
LINE
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s
11.5 8.8 7.3
39
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
125 400 700 125 400 700
LORD
Current Current
(% of rated current) (% of rated current)
40
Alarm · auxiliary switch terminal 49.5 3.3
Tab terminal nominal 110
55 18
(2.8W × 0.5L)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
■Temperature Characteristics
300
Operating time variation (%)
250
42
51
42
51
42
51
26.5
26.5
26.5
200
ø15 ø15 ø15
150 Rated
ambient
19 19 19 19
38 57 100
90
80
Single pole 2-pole 3-pole
70
60
-10 0 10 20 25 30 40 50 60
(Rated ambient 25°C)
152
7. Ordering Information
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
C Economy type C Economy type

Type name Type name
S Standard type S Standard type
NF NV
H High-performance type H High-performance type
NF250-SW NV250-SW
U Ultra current-limiting type U Ultra current-limiting type
MB Motor braker
Number of poles Number of poles

2P NV 1ø2W
1ø2W
3P NF 2P, 3P, 4P 3P 3P NV 1ø3W
MB 3P 3ø3W
4P NV 3ø4W
Rated current Rated current
Even for adjustable rated current
models, the working current should be Even for adjustable rated current
200A specified. 200A models, the working current should be
specified.
Rated voltage Rated voltage

Secify DC voltage when for use in
AC
DC circuit
AC 100-440V
200-440V
Rated sensitivity
Standard
Specify the applicable marine
current 30mA
standards 100 • 200 • 500mA
100 • 200 • 500mA
∗ “CE” is standard.
Connection F Front connection

method Standard
SL Solderless (box) terminal
Specify “CE”, if necessery
B Rear connection
B Pulg-in
PM
Built-in PAL Pre-alarm (contact output) Connection F Front connection

Accessories OAL Overcurrent alarm method SL Solderless (box) terminal
CYL Cylinder keylock B Rear connection
PAL B Pulg-in
PM
Internal AL Alarm switch Type of residual Blank High-speed type

accessories AX Auxiliary switch carrent protection Specify Time-delay type
Shunt trip
AL, SHT (AC110V) SHT
(Specify rated coil voltage.)
Built-in MG Insulation switch
Under voltage trip Accessories EAL Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch
UVT
(Specify rated coil voltage.)
External TBM Test button module
accessories SLT Lead-wire terminal block MG Pre-alarm module
PAL
INT Internal terminal type
Internal AL Alarm switch

accessories AX Auxiliary switch
MD Electrical operation device
Quantity Under voltage trip
F•S•V Operating handle AX, SLT, TBM UVT
(Specity rated coil voltage)
S•I•W Enclosure box
SLT Lead-wire terminal block
10 MI Mechanical interlock
Terminal cover External
TC accessories
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
MD Electrical operation device
LC • HL F•S•V Operating handle
Handle lock device
HL-S
S•I•W Enclosure box
CH Card holder
MI Mechanical interlock
Quantity Terminal cover
TC
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
10 LC • HL
Handle lock device
HL-S
CH Card holder
153
8. Melshort 2
A more rational and easier breakers selections

This software program ensures the easy selection of low-voltage Calculation and selection software
circuit breakers according to the required rated breaking capacity for low-voltage circuit breakers
and the related equipments
Preparation of single-line diagram
Coodination between high-voltage protection equipments
Short-circuit current calculation
Examination of cascade interruption combination Examination of selective interraption
Advantages
●Contents of a software ●Improvement of selection efficiency
The program's menu allows not only short-circuit current Because the coordination between various protection 7
calculations but also the examination of various systems can be examined and breakers can be selected
protection coordination. interactively using the personal computer screen, simple,
accurate and speedy operation is ensured.
●Preparation of single-line connection diagrams.
●Short-circuit calculations.
●Automatic selection of breaker type.
●Maintenance of a software
●Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination. The user can download the latest software updates by
accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page on the Internet.
●Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination.
●Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection
equipments. http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/lvs
8
●Protection coordination with motor start current.
■Selectable products menu ■Personal computer specifications

Low-voltage circuit breaker: Operating system: Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000/XP
MCCBs, ELCBs, ACBs, MCBs, Contactors, CPU : 166 MHz or faster
Thermal relays, High-voltage OCRs RAM memory size: min 32 MB
Free hard disk capacity: min 50 MB
Display resolution: min 640 × 480 dots
CD-ROM Drive:Double speed or higher
154
9. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS TECHNICAL
http://global.MitsubishiElectric.com/lvs
http://global.MitsubishiElectric.com/lvs
Advantages
■Substantial menu
Wide ranging technical information is classified into 6 groups.
■Expert oriented information
In addition to catalogs, including previous catalog editions and
technical data and other information, users get answers to their
technical questions.
■Enhanced information collection efficiency
By connecting your personal computer to the Internet, you can access
the latest information simply and quickly without a need to increase
storage space.
Model menu
■Molded-Case Since 1933, when Japan's first molded
Circuit Breakers case circuit breaker was released, we
(MCCB) have continuously provided circuit
breakers with monitors to ensure
■Earth-Leakage uninterrupted power supplies, the world's
first harmonics current proof and surge
Circuit Breakers ······· proof IC earth leakage circuit breakers,
(ELCB) and other new products as needed. We
have completed a 21st Century
■Miniature progressive super services for the circuit
Circuit Breakers breaker. In doing so, we have focused on
(MCB) urgently required advanced technology
and futuristic ease of use.
■Circuit Protectors ······ Compact, high-performance protectors

(CP) against short-circuit and overload, and for
control circuit operation for electronic
equipment, office machinery, and
machine tools.
■Air Circuit Breakers ······ All models have electronic tripping relays
(ACB) ensuring high reliability and excellent
performance.
155
INFORMATION SERVICE VIA THE INTERNET
■Catalogue
●The latest catalogue and old editions are
displayed for reading as is.
■Technical Infomation
●Access technical and maintenance data on
our low-voltage switchgear.
■Selection (Available soon)

●Downloading to the latest CD-ROM software
version (purchased separately) ensuring easy
short circuit current calculation of our low-
voltage switchgears and type selection.
Downloading is available only those who purchase
CD-ROM ''MELSHORT2'' for Mitsubishi selection.
■Standard
●Access international standards
■Contact us at : for specific types.
●Information center
Our area by area sales centers and contact sites
around the world are conveniently located.
●Technical support questions
Access information on products, handling, and Related site
maintenance of low-voltage switchgear via the We provide technical information on products via the
Internet. Internet as well as low-voltage switch-gear technical
information service.
●Web problems: Comment
If you have comments on the technical Mitsubishi Electric Corporation M's DINER Home page
information service, please contact us via the
Internet.
···http://www.melco.co.jp/index_e.htm
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation GLOBAL Home page
···http://www.mitsubishi.com/
9
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.–Germany
···http://www.mitsubishi-automation.com/
156
MEMO
Country / Region Company Address Telephone
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd 348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia + 61-2-9684-7586
Belgium Emac S.A. Industrialaan 1, B-1702 Groot-Bijgaarden, Belgium. + 32-(0)2-4810211
Vte. Agua Santa 4211 Casilla 30-D (P.O. Box) + 56-32-320652
Chile RHONA S.A.
Viña Del Mar. Chile
80 Xin Chang Road 4th Floor
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Shanghai) Shanghai Intelligence Fortune Leisure Plaza + 8 6 - ( 0)21-6120-0808
China
Limited Huang Pu district Shanghai 200003
P.R.China
Cra 53 No 29C-73 U.I.C.- Medellin.
Colombia Proelectrico Representaciones S.A. + 57-4-235-00-28
COLOMBIA.
Denmark Louis Poulsen CO. A/S Geminivej 32, DK-2670 Greve, Denmark. + 45-(0)43-95-95-95
P.O. BOX: 165-11516, Maglis El-Shaab
Egypt CAIRO ELECTRICAL GROUP + 20-2-7961337
Cairo-Egypt.
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch. Gothaer Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany. + 49-(0)2102-4860
52, Arkadias
Greece Drepanias Antonios S.A. + 30-1-57-81-599-699
STR.GR 121 32. Peristeri Athens Greece.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Hong Kong) 10/F Manulife Tower 169 Electric Road North
Hong Kong + 852-28878870
Limited Point. Hong Kong.
JL Muara Karang Selatan Blok A/Utara No.1
Indonesia P.T.SAHABAT INDONESIA. kav. NO.11 P.O. Box 5045/Jakarta/11050. + 62-(0)21-6621780
Jakarta Indonesia.
Ireland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Irish Branch. Westgate Business Park, Ballymount, Dublin 24, Ireland. + 353-(0)1-4505007
C.D.Colleoni-P.Perseo lng.2, Via Paracelso 12
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italy + 390-39-60-531
1-20041 Agrate Brianza (M1)
Israel GINO INDUSTRIES LTD. 26, Ophir street, IL-32235 Haifa, Israel + 972-(0)4-867 06 56
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION 2 Fl. Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg., 1F 660-11 + 82-2-3668-6567
Korea
KOREA CO., LTD. Deungchon-Dong, Kanguseo-Ku, Seoul, 157-030 Korea
43-47 Lane Xang Road P.O. BOX 2789 VT
Laos SOCIETE LAO IMPORT-EXPORT + 856-21-215043, 21-215110
Vientiane, Laos
COMPTOIR D'ELECTRICITE Cebaco Center-Block A. Autostrade Dora,
Lebanon + 961-1-240455
GENERALE-Liban P.O. BOX: 11-2597 Beirut-Lebanon.
12A, Jalan Pemberita U1/49, Temasya Industrial Park,
Malaysia mittric Sdn Bhd + 603-5569-3748
Glenmarie, 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia
NO. 137/139 Botataung Pagoda Road,
Myanmer PEACE MYANMAR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. + 95-(0)1-202589, 202449, 202590
Botataung Town Ship 11161, Yangon, Myanmar.
KHA 2-65, Volt House Dilli Bazar Post Box: 2108,
Nepal Watt & Volt House Co., Ltd. + 977-1-411330
kathmandu, Nepal
New Zealand Melco Sales (N.Z.) Ltd. 1 Parliament Street Lower Hutt. New Zealand. + 64-4-569-7350
Norway SCANELEC Leirvikasen 43B, N5020 Bergen, Norway. + 47-55-506000
Pakistan Prince Electric Co. 16 Brandreth Road Lahore 54000. Pakistan. + 92-(0)42-7654342
24th Fl. Galleria Corporate Center Edsa Cr, Ortigas Ave.
Philippines EDISON ELECTRIC INTEGRATED, INC. + 63-(0)2-643-8691
Quezon City, Metro Manila. Philippines.
Poland MPL Technology Sp zo.o. ul. Sliczna 36 31-444 Krakow, Poland. + 48-(0)12-632-28-85
P.O. BOX: 15955, Riyadh 11454,
Saudi Arabia CENTER OF ELECTRICAL GOODS + 966-1-4770149
Saudi Arabia.
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02 Mitsubishi
Singapore MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE LTD. + 65-6473-2308
Electric Building Singapore 159943
Slovenia INEA d.o.o. Ljubljanska 80, SI-61230 Domzale, Slovenia. + 386-(0)17-21 80 00
South Africa Circuit Breaker Industries LTD. Private Bag 2016. Isando 1600, Johannesburg, South Africa + 27-11-928-2000
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Caretera De Rubi 76-80, 08190 - Sant Cugat Del Valles
+ 34-93-595-3131
Spanish Branch. (Barcelona) Spain
Sweden Euro Energy Components AB Box 103 48 S-434 24 Kungsbcka, Sweden. + 46-(0)300-69 00 40
Mühlentalstrasse 136, 8201 Schaffhausen,
Switzerland Trielec A G + 41-(0)52-6258425
Switzerland
6F, NO. 105 Wu-Kung 3rd rd., Wu-Ku Hsiang,
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. + 886-(0)2-2298-8889
Taipei Hsien Taiwan
77/12 Bumrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak, + 66-223-4220-3
Thailand UNITED TRADING & IMPORT CO. LTD.
Pomprab Bangkok 10100.
The Netherlands Imtech Marine & Offshore Postbox 5054, NL-3008 AB-Rotterdam, Netherlands. + 31-(0)10-487 19 11
Fahri Gizden Sokak, Hacaloglu Apt. No.22/6 + 90-(0)212-2674011
Turkey GTS
TR-80280 Gayrettepe/Istanbul, Turkey.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. + 44-(0)1707-276-100
U.K. Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts, AL10 8xB, U.K.
UK-Branch.
Uruguay Fierro Vignoli S.A. P.O. box 20022/Suc Upae, Montevideo. Uruguay. + 598-2-92-08-08
Lle 8, Calpon Elinsu,
Venezuela ADESCO C.A. La Urbina-EDO, Miranda P.O. + 58-2-241-7634
BOX 78034 Caracas 1074A., Venezuela
Vietnam SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD. 47-49 Hoang Sa St., Da Kao Ward, D.1, HCMC + 84-8-910 4763 / 4758 / 4759
Safety Tips : Be sure to read the instruction manual fully before using this product.
FACTORY AUTOMATION SYSTEM: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
Revised publication, effective Jan. 2007.

Specifications subject to change without notice.
Y-0642A 0701 printed in Japan(MDOC) This pamphlet is made from recycled paper.

Model Case Circuit Breakers - Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Model Case Circuit Breakers - Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

W o r l d S u p e r

MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS &

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation's Fukuyama Works,

1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models ...................................................................... 11

2. Detailed Specifications ................................................................................................................. 13

3. Special Purpose Breakers ............................................................................................................ 34

4. Connection Method ...................................................................................................................... 42

8. Melshort 2 .................................................................................................................................... 154

Volume 60% downsized New Digital ETR IEC

Plenty of accessories, Easy installation

Internal Accessories Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer External Accessories

Interface I/O Unit

Eco Monitor Pro ME110S

WS Series International Standard Conformance List

• Compliance with worldwide standards (IEC/JIS/EN/GB/UL/CSA)

■ Full range of WS Series (up to 1600AF)

■ 400AF, 630AF & 800AF models easier to use

● MCCB-AC/DC common use (excl. Electronic trip type)

● Improved breaking capacity at 400/415VAC (NF400-SEW, NF630-SW/SEW, NF800-SEW)

■ NEW Digital ETR (Electronic Trip Relay) for

Is tripping current Is tripping current M

0.01 0.01 Current-converted value

■ Technology for WS Series

Relay Mechanism Breaking Performance

Internal Accessories Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer External Accessories

[PA Auto-Puffer] [JPT]

■ Best performance of SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW

Breaking Capacity lcu/lcs 200

100 Prospective short-circuit

Max. peak current (kA)

125 125 125

150 125 125 125 2

MAX. I2t (A2• s)

Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)

■ 2 types of Relay for SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW

Thermal Adjustable Relay

Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic)

Rating ln(A) (40C)

TL ls Pre-Alarm (for Indication)

Ts li Electronic type unit

Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SHT)

Previous models WS Series (New)

100-110, (100-120), 200-220, (220-240), 24/48, 100-110/120-130, 200-220/230-250,

Power Supply Module

IP-20PM with Safety Device

Product design which pursues greater ease of use by wide variations

Variable Connections IEC Rail Mounting for 32, 63AF

OFF Lock with 3 Padlock

Intelligent Measuring and communicating

Interface I/O Unit

Eco Monitor Pro ME110S

11 12 13 6 Super current-limiting unit*

Note *: All the accessories are field mounting type

NF-C NF-S NF-H NF-U

Earth-leakage circuit breakers

NV-C NV-S NV-H NV-U

Motor-protection breakers Circuit protectors

MB CP30-BA CP-B CP-S

Miniature circuit breakers

BH BH-P BH-S BH-PS BH-D6 BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D

List of Product Models

NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

NF-U NF125-RGW NF250-RGW